JP2018114414A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 comprises a start port capable of receiving a game ball shot into a game area 1100. When the game ball enters the start port, determination processing regarding winning is performed. When a specific result is obtained by the determination processing, a game state can be controlled to be a state where a winning game capable of acquiring game balls is performed. In this regard, the Pachinko machine 1 has a structure for facilitating positive ball entry into a winning hole in such a winning game, thereby suppressing a decrease in game amusement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning game is performed when a predetermined ball is paid when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the start port, a determination process is performed regarding a hit that triggers the winning game with a predetermined winning probability. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display device for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it has been won when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, a winning game that allows a player to win many prizes is displayed. Do.

JP 2008-022870 A

  According to the conventional gaming machine, the player can win a prize in the winning game. However, in such a winning game, there are many frustrating situations such as “the game ball does not reach because it is in an open state but the game ball does not arrive easily” due to the launch performance. It may occur, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: Launching means in which game media are sequentially fired to the game area;
An open / close member operable between a closed state and an open state, and when the open / close member is in the open state, a game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area enters the internal area. Winning prize means,
Advantageous game control means capable of executing game control advantageous to the player when the game medium that has entered the internal area of the prize opening means is received in the specific area;
An opening / closing control means for controlling the operation of the opening / closing member,
The winning prize means is:
When the launch of the game medium by the launching means is continued when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game medium placed in a waiting state for entering the internal area of the prize opening means within the specific rolling area When there is a medium maintaining means that can maintain the number at one or more, and a game medium that is waiting for entry by the medium maintaining means, the opening and closing member is placed in the entry waiting state. Maintenance medium entry permitting means for allowing the game medium to enter the inner area of the prize opening means,
The opening / closing control means includes
While the number of game media in the waiting state for entering the internal area of the prize opening means can be maintained at one or more by the medium maintenance means, it is shorter than the game medium firing interval by the launching means. An opening efficiency improvement control means capable of performing a short opening operation allowing the entry of the game medium in the waiting state for entry into the internal area of the winning-ahead means even though it is an opening time, a plurality of times;
When there is a game medium that enters the internal area of the winning opening means when the short opening operation is executed a plurality of times by the opening efficiency improvement control means, regardless of the number of the game media, A gaming machine characterized in that only one gaming medium can be guided.

  According to the above configuration, while the number of game media in the waiting state for entering the internal area of the prize opening means can be maintained at 1 or more, a short time that is less than the game media firing interval by the launching means However, since the opening operation (the short opening operation in which the expected value to win a prize is less than one) is performed, the opening / closing member is only opened. The expected value to win can be improved to one or more. Therefore, the number of game media winnings per unit time when the opening / closing member is in the open state can be dramatically increased, and the decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed by such excellent winning performance. .

  By the way, in the gaming machine in which the game control that is advantageous to the player can be executed based on the fact that the game medium that has entered the inner area of the winning hole means is accepted by the specific area, , It is required to provide a game based on a mechanical lottery probability such as whether or not a game ball is accepted into a specific area with a predetermined acceptance probability. In other words, if the mechanical lottery probability is set high, the basic gameability related to such mechanical lottery may be lost.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, each time a short opening operation is performed a plurality of times, while allowing the game media to enter the internal area, regardless of the number of game media that have entered, Only one game medium can be guided to a specific area. Therefore, when a short opening operation is performed a plurality of times, a plurality of game media can win, thereby increasing the expectation of acceptance into a specific area, but the mechanical draw probability is preferably kept low. It will be possible to suppress.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize opening unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize opening unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the winning opening unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the winning opening unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of a prize opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable start port unit of a prize opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable start opening unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the variable start port unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the variable start port unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting port door member of the variable starting port unit retracted from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the start port door member of the variable start port unit advanced from the upper side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit of the prize opening unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is AA sectional drawing in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the accessory prize winning unit of the accessory unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the accessory prize winning unit and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning opening unit of the accessory unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning opening unit and was seen afterwards. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the receiving part of the rotary body of the V winning opening unit faced the receiving side from the front side, (b) is the state which the receiving part of the rotary body faced the V winning opening side It is explanatory drawing shown from the front side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the right game ball in a game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the start port door member retracted in the variable start port unit from the front side, (b) is the game ball in the state where the start port door member has advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the start port door member retracted in the variable start port unit from the left front, (b) is the game ball in the state where the start port door member has advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the left front, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting port door member is retreating from the left front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when a prize winning port can be received in the bonus unit from the front side, and (b) is a V winning slot in which the receiving part of the rotating body in the V winning slot unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when it faces to the side from the front side. It is the figure which looked at the accessory prize winning opening and closing member from the top. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base substrate, a peripheral relay terminal plate, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal audio | voice signal cutoff board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the control process of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game process of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit game start process of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit game process of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the distribution table of the various random numbers used for special symbol lottery. It is a time chart which shows the example about the relationship between the open state of a prize winning opening when a small hit game (unfavorable small hit, advantageous small hit) is performed, and the operation state of a rotary body (sorting device). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about an example of the process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 16ms steady process performed every 16 ms in a sub main process. It is a time chart which shows the example about the flow of the game when progressing a game based on the game nature of pachinko machine 1, and the flow of the production according to it.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game frame 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 4 that is mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball T as a game medium is driven, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played. And a door frame 5 pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the person side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball T disposed below the game window 101. And a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. .

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball T is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can handle the handle device 500 with the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Is rotated, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch the game ball T, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 and performs a driving operation of the game ball T, and is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 closed on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 A glass unit 590 to be attached.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control board provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 40a, and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. And a ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300. And a handle for attaching the handle bracket 140 so that the right (open side) end of the front surface of the ball feed opening 113 for feeding to the front side and bulging forward disposed in the lower right corner in front view is inclined. An attachment portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114, and Cylinder lock 1010 upper by being formed shorter extended cylindrical shape toward forward below the dollar mounting portion 114 is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side can be prevented. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, and a rental unit 360 as electrical devices Handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is simply bent partially as the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bent projecting pieces 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. The contact recess 181 formed in a flat plate shape covering the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 and formed in an arc shape on the upper side thereof, and the contact recess 181 A post-crime projecting piece 182 projecting rearward along the upper end. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail fixed to the game board 4 and the open half is the front configuration The member 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail.

  The security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail and the inner rail with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. Collision with the glass plate 594 of the hit ball that is flying or reversing the passage portion can be prevented.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking protrusion 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. Note that the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, a side diffusing lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkle-like portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. The side inner lens 212 cooperates with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side to glitter the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. In this example, the LEDs 214c on the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. The side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-like front surface as in the side inner lens 212, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the crest-like projecting portion of the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 also includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate that can transmit sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side lower decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration frame 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light from the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4010, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4010. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially centering on the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the emission lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  The upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can make the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 have a light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls T paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and stored in the upper plate 301. The game ball T can be supplied to the hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish main body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the game balls T attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game ball T stored in the lower tray 302 and the upper portion on the left side of the tray unit base 310 is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates the ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store the game ball T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. In addition, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store the game balls T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. Thus, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310 c is closed by the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540. However, the game ball T that has been paid out comes into contact with the game ball T with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed. The rolling direction is changed, and the inside of the guide recess 310j is guided to roll rightward as viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Will be released. Thereby, the game balls T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball T blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player can manually play the game balls T. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls T that have been paid out to the upper plate 301 without bringing the player into the upper plate 301, and the player feels bothered by the storage of the game balls T in the upper plate 301. It is possible to inhibit the player from devoting the game ball T to the driving operation of the game ball T or playing the game ball T, and to reduce the interest in the game. The amount of T stored can be increased.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls T in the lower plate 302 collected on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g. The game ball T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls T are formed so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the game balls T supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has come to be.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball T from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side and looks like a feeling of distance.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the pan unit 300. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later, so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334, and the lower dish side cover 330, the lower dish lower left cover 334, Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. And an upper dish ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit base 310, and an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b (see FIG. 42 and FIG. 42) for guiding the game ball T communicating with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guiding the game ball T passing through the opening 344a downward. 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. A ball passage 344c through which the outgoing game ball T can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. 580 can be supplied.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344 b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581 b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a and the ball guide path 344b of the upper plate ball removal base 344. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g through the lower dish ball supply port 310h through the lower dish ball supply rod 310h. Can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like. Can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball T can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. The game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game ball T held in the state of being coincident with the punch hole 3324b and being stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball release button 354 is not continuously pressed.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. As the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coinciding with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball T can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls T are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. ing. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation according to the gaming state, or can move the dial operation unit 401. It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the base member 420. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly and can accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 including the upper dish 301 that stores the game balls T, the strength rigidity of the dish unit 300 is likely to store a large number of game balls T. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a hard hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 which is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body rear 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, when the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball T is driven. Be able to. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be driven. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520 and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thus, the launch of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and before the single button 520 is operated by releasing the single button 520 pressing operation. The game ball T can be launched with a driving strength of.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch power supply substrate 831 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a gaming ball T driving defect. Thereby making it possible.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball T paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. In spite of this, the game ball T (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of the present example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game balls T therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right in front view toward the front end of 542, and a second sphere inlet 542c that is disposed outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and has a larger opening than the first sphere inlet 542a. And a second sphere inlet 542c that communicates with the second sphere passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of about 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T. A storage space 546 that can store a predetermined amount of the game ball T is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d through the foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged at the substantially upper center in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It can supply to the upper plate 301 from the outlet 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball. From the outlet 544b, the tray unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply rod 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball T launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls through the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball T received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d ( Supply).

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is swingable by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. The swing member 548 supported by the shaft 542, the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and the swing member 548 are urged by the full detection sensor 550 in a non-detection state. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball T can be removed.

  In this example, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 through the foul cover unit 540. If the game ball T is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770 When the normal passage 773 upstream of 774 is also full, the game ball T circulates to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full sphere outlet 776 of the unit 770 to the second sphere inlet 542c, the second sphere passage 542d, and the second sphere outlet of the foul cover unit 540 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T cannot be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the inside of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The stagnant game ball T is stored. Further, as the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls T are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls T acts on the swing member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 is exerted. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves against the left side. When the detection piece 548a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126), and The player is notified that the game ball T in the dish unit 300 is discharged to the outside.

  When the game ball T in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650 and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. T can be extracted to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removing button 341 of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, and the front and rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has an entrance 581a that penetrates through and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and that is open at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is open A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction and entering from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and a rear cover 582, A partitioning portion that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 581 and partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball release member 583 having 83a and the game balls T on the partition portion 583a of the ball release member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 that is supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 is formed. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. In addition, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball T. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The game ball T is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654 by the firing power supply substrate 831.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball removal port 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381b and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball T entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by the coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and is on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the upper end portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting part 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece part 588b and the upper side of the lower piece part 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the ball 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view and passes between the outer rail and the inner rail. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I. It moves along the route connecting with the shortest distance in the passage. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction of narrowing the gap (leftward in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111a and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Accordingly, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to this example, the game ball T is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball T is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is played. When the player operates, the game ball T is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, so that the door frame 5 A game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game window 101 of the player, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or A ball feed unit 580 having a ball feed solenoid 585 and the like and a discharge mechanism (ball remover member 583) are disposed. Not only the ball feeding member 584 and the hit ball launching device 650 are brought as close as possible, but when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball feeding member 584 side It is possible to reduce the number of game balls T remaining in the game as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball T can be hit. It is possible to prevent the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the game ball T from being fully filled with the game ball T due to the insertion operation. Since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome with respect to the ball T and to suppress the interest, the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301. The pachinko machine 1 that can attract a player's interest by making the game area 1100 relatively large (wide) can be obtained.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, and if the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced with the game ball T, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be exchanged. Even if a failure occurs, the failure can be easily eliminated by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball T is discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward, or the upper plate The game ball T can be stopped from being discharged from the player 301, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper plate 301 vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal) The durability of the member 583) can be increased. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, the game ball T can be made difficult to repel even if the game ball T collides with the partition portion 583a. It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged due to the repelling of the ball and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the partition portion 583a is moved when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper pan ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. Similar effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b which bent the partitioning part 583a, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning part 583a, the turning hook which bent the impact. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing by the portion 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 is discharged when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged. Can be minimized, and the game balls T can be discharged well by improving the streets of the game balls T in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls T in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 has a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and is formed of a synthetic resin and is formed of an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 592, and two sheets for closing front and rear ends of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, thereby the door frame. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. At the same time, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is provided. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 give a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward larger than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, a player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 include peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side as viewed from the front is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to light-decorate the upper dish 301. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650 for driving the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and the game ball T to the upper plate 301 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 A prize ball unit 700 for paying out and a game ball T attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Sphere blocking flow And a mouth closing unit 790,.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 toward the rear. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 which is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and a positioning projection 607 which projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1112 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball T is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall portion 604 is opened. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided so that the game ball T can be circulated from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed on the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and a game ball T that circulates in the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described in detail later. Has come to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. It is.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a gap is formed through which the game ball T cannot pass, and the game ball T is held at the base end of the firing rail 660. The hitting ball 656 (tip 658) is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball T held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the stop piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662 can be hit. And a stopper 664 for regulating.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is depressed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111a of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball T hit by the hitting ball basket 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. . The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111a. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball T so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side when viewed from the front of the launch rail 660, thereby bringing the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. You can type in. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball T that has become a foul ball without being driven in falls down the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching power supply substrate 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the hitting ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball T, and the ball feed solenoid 585 from that state. When the driving of the ball feeding member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side, so that the launching solenoid is substantially simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball 656. Can be done.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball T supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined payout. Based on the instruction, the payout is made to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a game ball T attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing a game ball T supplied from the island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls T stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls T arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. Then, a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid game ball T to the lower plate 302 side is mainly provided.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the game ball T paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device attachment section 714, and the rear An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It is like that.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and can prevent the game ball T from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the tank rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball T can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls T can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom part is inclined so that the part is lowered. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 Is received, and can be transferred to the prize ball device 740 side from the discharge port 731a. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. A piece 735 and a ground plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball T in the tank rail 731 are provided. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. Can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcing the game ball T, which has not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, to become one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a side. It attaches to the tank rail 731 so that it may become.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thereby, when the upper part of the game balls T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T aligned in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is sent to the prize ball device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball T in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball T comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of the game ball T to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. ing.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game ball T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side so as to open to the upper end and extend to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T. A passage 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b as viewed from the rear, and bent in a substantially letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side of the view, and a ball passage 741d that extends downward and communicates with the lower right side (axis support side) of the distribution space 741b and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects a presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the game ball T attached to the unit base 741 and circulates in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotations, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates together with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 for holding the rotation angle sensor 752 on the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. It is equipped with.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The grounding metal 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is reduced. Can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball T, the presence of the playing ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or It is reported to the hall side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T flowing in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. The payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c. The game balls T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game ball T paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side by 748 is, from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d, a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, The substrate unit 800 can be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The insides of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball T paid out to the prize ball path 741 c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball T is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball T can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving the game ball T flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). ), A normal path 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T from the position immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball T flowing through the normal path 773 is released forward. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right front end of the front end, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball T toward the front side from a position that is further to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 ( Figure 9 and the reference), and includes full Tan passage 775 game balls T which has flowed through the full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged to the front, the.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 for receiving a game ball T that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T received at the ball extraction port 777 forward, and the game ball T flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and a normal ball at the left end in front view. A ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball T released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Yes. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base. The main body frame base ball extraction passageway 622 is delivered to 600.

  The full tank branching unit 770 receives the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball T that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball T flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game ball T, the first of the foul cover unit 540 is obtained. The game ball T that has become unable to exit from the ball outlet 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually reaches the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. The inside is also full. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving in the horizontal direction in the branch space 772, and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball T thus entered enters the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full ball exit 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. Is supplied to the lower plate 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game ball T becomes full in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is removed until the full tank is eliminated. Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball T is supplied to the ball striking device by operating the ball pulling button of the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being interrupted due to being stopped, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example uses the path of the game ball T to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls T that are branched and stay in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773 are discharged. Becomes a game ball T that can be directly shot by the hitting ball launcher 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path (the full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls T in the main body frame 3 can be obtained. Moreover, it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage trays is different increases.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Further, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame having only one storage tray. Even if it is changed to 5, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage is reduced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls T for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. It has become.

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is sent to the upper plate 301. Therefore, the frequency at which the game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 is transferred to the upper plate 301 is increased. It is possible to reduce the amount of the game ball T, so that the player can be dedicated to the driving operation of the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game ball T, and the player is not frequently concerned about the storage amount. While being able to play a game, it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. Even if the game ball T can no longer come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is as much as possible. The substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. When only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray is filled with the game balls T, and the game balls T cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. However, since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal path 773 but also the full tank path 775 has many. The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game ball T in each door frame 5 is changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to the maximum and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to distribute the game balls T in a plurality of rows, and the amount of storage (reserved amount) of the game balls T in the full tank branch unit 770 ) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount of the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be avoided, and can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball T in the main body frame 3.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and there is a problem. When this occurs, it is possible to easily find the location where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, so that the malfunction can be resolved early and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball T.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical end at the tip, and the other end (lower end) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T will spill out from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the board unit base 810. The board base unit 810 also passes the game ball T flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can send.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launcher 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, and by changing the model, etc. When the game board 4 is replaced, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) can also be easily replaced, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that can realize the driving characteristics matching the concept of the new model to be replaced, By replacing the launch power supply board 831 provided with the DC / DC converter 831a, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 may be matched with the new game board 4. it can. Accordingly, the driving characteristics of the game ball T can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 with respect to island facilities such as a game hall. It can be simplified and can be exchanged in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall can be suppressed. In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be detachable, the cost for changing the driving characteristics is reduced as compared with the case where the entire payout control board 4110 is exchanged. And the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to solve the problem. The game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 opens the game ball T released upward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the upper left side of the left and right center in front view. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, the discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging, and the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the launch power supply board box 830 and the entire rear face of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. And a rear box housing portion 844 capable of housing the front end.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball T that has flowed down and the game ball T that has been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, as will be described in detail later, It can be discharged to the lower side.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper left rear surface in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in the rear right end rear surface. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be reliably prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 are connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c provided to the peripheral control board 4010 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  In this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103 a and the test terminal 1103 b of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a substrate management seal 1103c (see FIG. 5) attached to the rear surface of the main control substrate box 1103 faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1103d of the main control board box 1103 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, even without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the effect display device 1115 in the game board 4. It is positioned behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 4010 and the like provided in the apparatus, so that heat from the peripheral control board 4010 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are attached to the top and bottom two places with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, or the like. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist the same effect as the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the portion 710b, and a game ball T released from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, after the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 74 are provided. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the rear surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side surface can be visually confirmed, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visually inspected) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. A pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game ball T cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball T from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the above, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball T entering.

[2. Game board configuration]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to a frame-shaped front component member 1111 that partitions the outer peripheral side of the game area 1100, and to the rear side of the front component member 1111. And a flat gaming panel 1112 that partitions the rear end side of the gaming area 1100.

  The front component member 1111 is formed in a quadrangular outer periphery shape, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semicircular shape on the left side and a substantially U-shaped right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. This front component member 1111 forms a first inner wall portion (outer rail) 1111a that is smoothly connected to the entire semicircular arc-shaped portion on the inner peripheral surface and a portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion. In the U-shaped part, the remaining part extending vertically and the part extending left and right on the lower side form a second inner wall part 1111b connected in an L shape. Further, the front component member 1111 is a guide wall extending in an arc shape along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end in front view of the portion extending in the left and right direction) to the vicinity of the upper left corner in the front view. (Inner rail) 1111c and a check piece 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c.

  The game panel 1112 has an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component member 1111 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 is connected to the lower end of the guide wall 1111c. In addition, the gaming panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the gaming area 1100.

  Further, the game board 4 includes a substrate holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the substrate holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. A main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) that is housed in the game and controls the game content, and a function that displays a game state or the like based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 and is attached to the front component 1111 Display 1114.

  Furthermore, the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game display panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112 and to the rear side of the production display system 1115. And a peripheral control board 4010 for controlling the effect display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the board 4100. The game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100, and a back unit 3000 (see FIG. 6) attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112. It is equipped with.

  The front unit 1120 is attached to the approximate center in the game area 1100 in a front view, and a center accessory 1130 that divides the game area 1100 right and left, and a winning opening attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. A unit 1150.

[2-1. Center character]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in a frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening of the game panel 1112. This center accessory 1130 releases a warp entrance 1131 through which the game ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a game ball T that has entered the warp entrance 1131, and is open at the bottom in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 1132.

  Further, on the right side of the center accessory 1130 as viewed from the front, a right channel 1133 through which a game ball T can flow and a game ball T that is driven into the right channel 1133 (right-handed) can pass. A gate member 1134 and a gate sensor 1135 for detecting the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 are provided.

  This right flow path 1133 is an approach that opens upward on the lower side of the stop portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b in the upper right corner of the front component member 1111 intersect with each other. A mouth 1133a, an entrance path 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, a gate space 1133c of a predetermined width connected to the lower end of the entrance path 1133b and having a gate member 1134 disposed at the center, A guide path 1133d that guides the game ball T downward from a lower end of the gate space 1133c along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111, and an opening at the lower end of the guide path 1133d. And a discharge port 1133e that discharges to the surface.

  In the right channel 1133, the entrance 1133a is opened larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the entrance path 1133b following the entrance 1133a has a width slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball T on the lower end side. Thus, it is formed to become narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c extends greatly vertically and horizontally on the lower side of the approach path 1133b, and is formed in such a size that the game ball T can flow down on both the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 disposed at the approximate center. In the gate space 1133c, a gate member 1134 is disposed at a position slightly to the right of the front view from directly below the entry path 1133b. The gate space 1133c is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered to the right side when viewed from the front, and the upper end of the guide path 1133d is opened at the lowest right end.

  The guide path 1133d extends in an arc shape along a portion extending vertically in the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the inner wall of the guide path 1133d, and the flow speed of the game ball T can be suppressed by the game ball T coming into contact with these protrusions. The guide path 1133d extends downward to about half the height of the gaming area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly to the left in front view.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the prize opening unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge port 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center accessory 1130, and a general winning port 1151 that can always receive the game ball T, and a warp outlet 1132 of the center accessory 1130. A first start port 1152 that is disposed on the lower side and is capable of receiving the game ball T at all times, and a second start port that is disposed on the right side of the first start port 1152 in front view and is always open into the game area 1100. 1153, placed on the lower side of the first starting port 1152, and placed on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 1153, and a big winning port 1154 that allows the game ball T to be received by opening and closing according to the gaming state. The prize winning opening 1155 that can receive the game ball T by opening and closing depending on the gaming state, and the inside of the prize winning opening 1155 are arranged in the inner area of the prize winning opening 1 And V winning hole 1156 game balls T accepted there is a receivable 55, a.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with the first starting port 1152 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 and the flat base plate 1160 attached to the front surface of the base plate 1160. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a flow path of the game ball T, and a transparent front surface attached to the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161 A decorative board 1162, an attacker unit 1200 that is disposed at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and that has a special winning opening 1154 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front surface of the attacker unit 1200 The variable start position is located on the upper right side of the view and is provided with a second start port 1153 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. The accessory unit 1220 is disposed on the right side of the front unit 1210 and the variable start port unit 1210, and is provided with an accessory winning port 1155 and a V winning port 1156, and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. And.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the game ball T received by the first starting port 1152 downward, and a first starting port guide member 1163, and a first starting port. The ball detection sensor 1164 that is attached to the guide member 1163 and detects the game ball T received by the first start port 1152 is disposed on the rear side of the first start port 1152, and an LED is mounted on the front surface. The first starter decorative board 1165, the board stay 1166 that supports the first starter decorative board 1165 and is attached to the first starter guide member 1163, and the base at the lower position of the attacker unit 1200. And a prize winning decoration board 1167 which is attached to the rear side of the plate 1160 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The winning opening unit 1150 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting port 1153, and includes a second starting port decoration board 1168 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a second starting port. A start opening reflector 1169 that covers the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and is attached to the variable start opening unit 1210, and a second start opening 1153 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable start opening unit 1210. The second starting port guide member 1170 for guiding the game ball T received in the first position downward, and the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 that is attached to the second starting port guide member 1170 is detected. A ball detection sensor (not shown) and an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 attached to the rear side of the second start port guide member 1170 and A first relay board 1172 that relays the connection between the start-up solenoid 1215 of the variable start-up port unit 1210 and the main control board 4100, and covers the rear side of the first relay board 1172 to the rear side of the second start-up port guide member 1170. And a substrate cover 1173 attached thereto.

  Furthermore, the prize opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the accessory unit 1220, and the accessory unit cover 1174 is located above the accessory winning opening 1155. A prize winning board decoration board 1175 arranged at the upper part of the front face and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a prize winning prize attached to the accessory unit cover 1174 that covers the front side of the winning prize prize decoration board 1175. The mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, and the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory unit 1220. And the second relay that relays the connection between the V winning solenoid 1232 and the main control board 4100 A plate 1178, a general winning opening guide member 1179 that is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 and guides the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 downward, and a general winning opening guide member 1179. And a general winning opening sensor 1180 (see FIG. 126) that detects the game ball T that is attached and received in the general winning opening 1151.

  The base plate 1160 of the prize opening unit 1150 protrudes forward in the upper part of the left part when viewed from the front and is open at the top and rear and has a receiving part 1160a that forms a first starting port 1152, and a receiving part 1160a. An attacker opening portion 1160b that penetrates from the back to the front and extends from side to side and extends to the left and right and into which an after-mentioned winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is inserted from the rear side, and an upper portion of the central portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A second starting port opening 1160c that penetrates back and forth and the second starting port 1153 faces the rear side, and extends from the second starting port opening 1160c to the left and right in the front and rear direction and extends in a slit shape. A door slit 1160d through which the front side of the start port member 1214 of the start port unit 1210 can pass, and the start port reflector 116 above the door slit 1160d. Comprises of a second start hole upper shelf emitting decorative unit 1160e emitted decorated on the left and right on the front side and a position by arrayed has been and second start hole LED decorative substrate 1168, the.

  Further, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth on the right side when viewed from the front of the second start opening upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e, and forms an accessory winning port 1155 described later of the accessory winning unit 1220A in the accessory unit 1220. Of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 are inserted so that the front portions protrude forward from the rear side, and the accessory winning port reflector 1176 is disposed above the accessory winning port opening 1160f. An accessory winning port light emitting decoration portion 1160g that is lined up on the left and right at the front side and is illuminated by the LEDs of the accessory winning port decoration board 1175, and penetrates back and forth below the accessory winning port opening 1160f. The ball guiding member 1238 (described later) of the V prize opening unit 1220B in the accessory unit 1220 is inserted so as to protrude forward from the rear side. The game ball T received in the general prize opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the shape of a bowl that extends rearward to the upper part of the right part of the front view and opened upward, And a collar portion 1160i that is guided rearward and delivered to the general winning opening guide member 1179.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat plate 1160 into the game area 1100 in the front, and has the flat front plate portion 1161a as the front surface. It is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open. The front flow path forming member 1161 has a receiving portion 1161b that is open at the upper right and rear in the front view and guides the game ball T received from the upper side to form a general winning opening 1151, and a receiving portion 1161b. From the right side of the receiving part 1161b to the left side of the extension line of the receiving part 1161b so that the left side is lower than the receiving part 1161b. 1161c, a receiving portion lower right wall 1161d that extends downward from the left end of the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning hole 1155, and a left side from the receiving portion 1161b that is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T. The position of the game ball T from the position of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning prize opening unit 1220A, which will be described later, below the receiving part lower shelf 1161c and above the bonus winning prize opening 1155. The receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e extending vertically to a position slightly higher than the left end of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e along the upper side of the accessory winning port 1155 and on the right side of the left end of the accessory winning port 1155. An accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f extending leftward to the upper side.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from a position in contact with the left end of the accessory winning port 1155 (the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221) at the lower left than the left end of the accessory winning port upper ceiling wall portion 1161f. A shortly extending accessory winning opening left shelf 1161g and a second starting opening region right standing wall 1161h extending vertically from the right end of the winning prize winning left shelf 1161g to the lower side of the second starting opening 1153; A second start port region lower shelf 1161i extending leftward from the lower end of the second start port region right standing wall 1161h to the left end of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161h to the left by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g. The second starting port region lower shelf 1161i extends leftward from the center in the left-right direction to a position above the left side so that the left side becomes lower from a position that is lower than the outer diameter of T. The second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j disposed at a position directly above the second starting port 1153, and the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j hangs downward from the right end so as to cover the right side of the second starting port 1153. The second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k, the guide piece 1161l protruding leftward from the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k, and the outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j Than And a, a second start hole area left vertical wall 1161m extending vertically to a position downward from the upper position than the second start hole upper shelf portion 1161j are separated into slightly larger left.

  The winning opening unit 1150 according to the present embodiment includes a ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the first start opening guide member 1163 and a ball detection sensor 1208 (described later) attached to the attacker unit 1200. A first start port sensor 1190 for detecting the game ball T received in 1152 is formed. Further, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second start port guide member 1170 and a ball detection sensor 1213 (described later) attached to the variable start port unit 1210 are received by the second start port 1153. A second start port sensor 1191 that detects the game ball T is formed.

  Although details will be described later, the winning opening unit 1150 is connected to a big winning port sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received in the big winning port 1154 of the attacker unit 1200 and an accessory winning port 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. An accessory winning prize sensor 1224 for detecting the received game ball T and a specific sensor 1239 for detecting the gaming ball T received at the V winning opening 1156 of the accessory unit 1220 are provided.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 104 to 106, the attacker unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 includes a large winning opening 1154 that opens toward the front and extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a large winning opening 1154. An attacker lower base 1201 that forms the lower part, an attacker upper base 1202 that is attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and is attached to the base plate 1160 and that forms the upper part of the big prize opening 1154, and the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper part A large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 that is supported by a base 1202 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and opens / closes the large winning opening 1154, and is attached between an attacker lower base 1201 and an attacker upper base 1202. And an plunger having a plunger 1204a that moves forward and backward according to the gaming state. A link 1205 that transmits the advance / retreat of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 and opens / closes the large winning opening / closing member 1203, and a game ball that is attached to the lower base 1201 of the attacker and received by the large winning opening 1154 A large winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting T, a guiding member 1207 attached to the lower side of the lower attacker base 1201 for guiding the game ball T detected by the large winning opening sensor 1206 to the rear, and an upper attacker 1202 And a ball detection sensor 1208 that is attached to the upper portion and detects the game ball T received by the first start port 1152.

  The big prize opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 is a horizontally long rectangular shape whose length in the left-right direction is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball T and whose vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball T. The opening is opened and opened by a plate-shaped special prize opening / closing member 1203. The big prize opening 1154 is configured such that the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball T cannot be received. This is a so-called variable prize opening that allows the game ball T to be received when the big prize opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state.

  An attacker lower base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and extends vertically through a horizontally long box-shaped storage unit 1201a opened front and top, and a bottom wall of the storage unit lower 1201a. A through hole 1201b through which the sphere T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c that is formed below the through hole 1201b and into which the big prize opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side at both left and right ends of the storage unit lower 1201a A pair of bearing portions 1201d arranged below, a solenoid support portion 1201e formed on the rear side of the right side of the lower portion 1201a, and a U-shape formed on the front side of the solenoid support portion 1201e and on the right side of the lower portion 1201a. The supporting shaft 1201f is formed on the rear side of the storage portion 1201a at the center in the left-right direction. And a, a passage hole 1201g that over can penetrate vertically.

  The lower housing portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the special winning opening 1154, and is inclined so that the bottom wall becomes lower toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201d is for rotatably supporting the prize winning opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with a later-described bearing upper portion 1202b of the attacker upper base 1202. The shaft support 1201f can support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from above. The passing hole 1201g is received by the first starting port 1152, and the game ball T that has passed through the through hole 1202e of the upper attacker base 1202 passes therethrough.

  The attacker upper base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the horizontally long box-shaped accommodation unit 1202a that is open front and lower, and on the lower front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the accommodation unit 1202a. A pair of bearing portions 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c through which the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted in the front and rear sides on the right side of the housing portion 1202a, and an upper rear side of the housing portion 1202a. A sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from above, and a through hole 1202e through which the game ball T passes vertically so as to allow passage through the right portion of the sensor support portion 1202d. .

  The upper portion 1202a of the upper attacker base 1202 cooperates with the lower portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a big prize opening 1154. The pair of upper bearing portions 1202b cooperate with the lower bearing portion 1201d of the lower attacker base 1201 to rotatably support the special prize opening opening / closing member 1203. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a rotation shaft 1205a (described later) of the link member 1205. Through the through hole 1202e, the game ball T received by the first start port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208 passes.

  The prize winning opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a flat door 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door 1203a, and the door 1203a. And a working pin 1203c projecting rightward from a position obliquely below the right end side shaft pin 1203b.

  The door portion 1203a of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is formed to have a size capable of closing the big prize opening 1154 formed by the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by a pair of bearing lower portions 1201d and a pair of bearing upper portions 1202b of the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202, respectively. The action pin 1203c is inserted between a pair of operating pins 1205c described later of the link member 1205.

  The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 in a state where the plunger 1204a is inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the lower attacker base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a advances and retreats from the right end side. . The plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disc shape at the tip. The attacker solenoid 1204 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1204a protrudes due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotation shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engagement portion 1205b protruding rearward from a position eccentric from the axis of the rotation shaft 1205a, and a rotation shaft 1205a. A pair of actuating pins 1205c projecting forward from a position deviated from the axis of the shaft. The rotation shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 1201 f of the lower attacker base 1201 and the shaft hole 1202 c of the upper attacker base 1202. The engaging portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a in the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pin 1203c of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

  In this link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205 b is mainly moved in the left-right direction with the relationship between the engagement portion 1205 b and the pair of operation pins 1205 c being attached to the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of operating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. The link member 1205 rotates in the clockwise direction when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the protruding state to the immersive direction (left direction in front view).

  The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape whose upper and rear sides are open, and is attached to the lower side of the attacker lower base 1201 below the through hole 1201b.

  In the normal state of the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment, the plunger 1204a protrudes rightward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operating pin 1205c of the pair of operating pins 1205c is in contact with the operating pin 105c of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 from above, and the flat door 1203a is in an upright state. The grand prize opening 1154 is closed. That is, the game ball T cannot be received in the special winning opening 1154.

  In the attacker unit 1200, when the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 1204a moves to the left and enters a state of being immersed except for the disc-shaped tip. By the movement of the plunger 1204a in the left direction, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move in the left direction, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the moving shaft 1205a.

  When the link member 1205 rotates clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves so as to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c moves upward from the action pin 1203c of the big prize opening opening / closing member 1203. The lower operation pin 1205c comes into contact with the action pin 1203c from the lower side and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the big prize opening opening / closing member 1203 rotates so that the upper end moves forward about the shaft pin 1203b, and the flat door 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the game ball T can be received into the special winning opening 1154.

[2-2B. Variable start port unit]
The variable start port unit 1210 of the winning port unit 1150 includes a second start port 1153 that opens forward in the front right part of the front view as shown mainly in FIGS. The second start port 1153 is formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to pass therethrough. The variable start port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 that is open on the front and upper sides, a box-shaped upper case 1212 that is attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and that is partially open on the front and opened on the lower side. A ball detection sensor 1213 that is attached to the lower case 1211 and detects the game ball T received by the second start port 1153, a start port member 1214 that is slidably supported by the lower case 1211, and a lower case A start port solenoid 1215 having a plunger 1215a supported between 1211 and the upper case 1212 and moving back and forth in accordance with the gaming state, and the start and stop of the start port door member 1214 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 The slide position of the link member 1216 to be slid and the start door member 1214 It includes a slide detection sensor 1217 that knowledge, the.

  The lower case 1211 of the variable start port unit 1210 is formed in a state of being inclined so as to be lowered from the front side toward the rear side at the position of the right part of the upper surface, and a ball guiding part 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T; A through hole 1211b that passes vertically through the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and allows the game ball T to pass therethrough, and is opened forward on the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a. The ball detection sensor 1213 supports insertion. A sensor support hole 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d that are formed at the center in the left-right direction and face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and a columnar support pin 1211e that protrudes upward from the left part of the upper surface. It is equipped with.

  The upper case 1212 of the variable start port unit 1210 has a passage upper portion 1212a which is open at the front right portion of the front face and is inclined so that the upper wall becomes lower as it goes rearward. In the case 1212, a second start opening decoration is formed between a front end opening forming portion 1212 b that forms a lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front of the passage upper portion 1212 a and a base plate 1160 formed above the front end opening forming portion 1212 b. A substrate post-holding portion 1212c that sandwiches the substrate 1168 and the start-port reflector 1169; a solenoid cover portion 1212d that is formed on the rear side of the substrate rear-pressing portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covers the start-port solenoid 1215 from above; It has.

  The upper passage portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms a second start port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. The upper portion 1212a of the passage is formed in a U shape with the opening facing downward, and the right side extends downward longer than the left side. Further, the passage upper portion 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding portion 1211a.

  The front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 has a front end formed at the same position as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a in the front-rear direction. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) from the vicinity of the lower left end of the passage upper portion 1212a to the left. After extending diagonally to the height of the passageway, it extends further to the left at the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a at a large angle (about 45 degrees) with respect to the horizontal, and further extends horizontally to the left from there, and then the passage upper portion. 1212a is formed in a shape extending downward to a height intermediate between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side.

  In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a, extends horizontally from the upper end to the right, and then extends to the lower right. It extends from the lower end of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees to the horizontal, and further, the right side becomes lower from there to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the upper portion 1212a So as to extend diagonally long. A first guide portion 1214a, a second guide portion 1214b, a third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the start port door member 1214 are disposed below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

  The start port member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 includes a flat plate-like first guide portion 1214a extending obliquely toward the lower right in front view (an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and a first guide portion. A flat plate-like second guide portion 1214b extending obliquely from the right end of 1214a to the lower right of the front view at a smaller angle (about 5 degrees) than the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the horizontal, and the second guide portion 1214b A flat plate-like third guide portion 1214c that is provided on a right side of the right end and lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b and is inclined to be lowered rearward, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c The front wall portion 1214d extending to the same height as the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and the flat standing wall portion 12 extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c to the upper side of the front wall portion 1214d. Includes a 4e, the.

  The start port member 1214 includes a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide portion 1214b, a flat slider portion 1214g extending backward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider A cylindrical connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g and a detecting portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g are provided.

  The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the start door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the first guide portion 1214a and the like in the front-rear direction is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Further, the left and right lengths of the start door member 1214 (the length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) are formed to be about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T. Has been. Further, the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed to be about 2/3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T. The first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are disposed below the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212. The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e are disposed between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212.

  The slider portion 1214g of the start door member 1214 is inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 at both left and right ends. Thus, the start port door member 1214 is supported by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth. The connection pin 1214h is slidably inserted into a connection hole 1216e (described later) of the link member 1216, thereby being connected to the link member 1216, and the advance / retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 is transmitted. The detection unit 1214 i can be detected by a slide detection sensor 1217.

  The start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid covering portion 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a advances and retreats from the left end side. The plunger 1215a of the start-up solenoid 1215 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at the tip. Further, the start-up solenoid 1215 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1215a protrudes (extends) due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1216 of the variable start port unit 1210 includes a cylindrical main body 1216a that is rotatably fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and a first piece 1216b that extends outward from the main body 1216a. And an engaging portion 1216c that protrudes upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and can be engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215, and the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. A second piece 1216d extending at a right angle longer than the first piece 1216b and extending vertically in the tip of the second piece 1216d and extending in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extending. A connecting hole 1216e having a long hole shape into which the connecting pin 1214h of the cage start door member 1214 is slidably inserted from below. There.

  The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a from the upper end of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends at a right angle in the clockwise direction with respect to the first piece 1216b in a plan view from the lower side of the first piece 1216b in the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d is formed in such a length that the tip is located near the center in the left-right direction of the lower case 1211 in a state where the main body portion 1216a is fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable start port unit 1210 is configured such that the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 is positioned below the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. And a starting port solenoid 1215 is disposed on the upper side of the slider portion 1214g on the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b so as to be horizontally long. On the lower side, the link member 1216 transmits the advance / retreat of the plunger 1215 a to the start port door member 1214. Thereby, the distance (size) in the front-rear direction of the variable start port unit 1210 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

  In a normal state (a state where the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the variable start port unit 1210 of the present embodiment has a plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 protruding leftward by a biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and the first piece 1216b. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending at a right angle to the clockwise direction is located on the rear side of the center of the support pin 1211e. The start door member 1214 provided with the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 has a front end substantially coinciding with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the start port door member 1214 is in a state of being immersed (retracted) from the game area 1100 (a state of an unacceptable position). In this normal state, the detection unit 1214 i of the start door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the start opening solenoid 1215 is energized in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the variable start opening unit 1210 enters the plunger 1215a in the right direction. (See FIG. 113). When the plunger 1215a of the start-up solenoid 1215 moves to the right and is immersed, the entire link member 1216 is viewed in plan with the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 as the center by the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. Rotate clockwise.

  By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d moves so as to move relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting port door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting port door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. Accordingly, the front end of the start port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the start port door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214e appear in the game area 1100 (the state of the receivable position). In a state where the start port door member 1214 is slid forward and appears in the game area 1100, the detection portion 1214 i of the start port door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a with the start door member 1214 appearing in the game area 1100, the first guide portion 1214a rolls to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b. Sent up. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, and to the third guide portion 1214c disposed on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. Sent.

  Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, the direction of the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes to the rear, and the third guide portion 1214c rolls backward. It is sent from the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the rear lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212. That is, the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153. At this time, in the start port door member 1214, the right end of the third guide portion 1214c is provided with an upright wall portion 1214e that is about half the height of the outer diameter of the game ball T. The game ball T rolling from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c comes into contact with the standing wall portion 1214e and is prevented from rolling to the right side of the third guide portion 1214c. In addition, the game ball T that has been rolled from the left to the third guide portion 1214c can also be rolled backward by the guide piece 11611l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  The game ball T released backward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 disposed on the lower side of the third guide portion 1214c, and is guided to the ball guide portion 1211a. Then, the ball enters the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end of the ball guiding portion 1211a, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second start port guide member 1170.

  Since the second start port 1153 having such a configuration is always open forward in the game area 1100 regardless of the game situation, is the game ball T apparently acceptable? looks like. However, since the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is disposed above the second starting port 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from the upper side, it is disposed below the second starting port 1153. Unless it jumps up to the height of the second start port 1153 when falling to the second start port region lower shelf 1161i, it is not accepted by the second start port 1153. That is, the second start port 1153 according to this embodiment is arranged in an area where the game ball T is extremely difficult to flow down in the game area 1100.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 to the second start port 1153 as described above. By doing so, the game ball T can be received.

  That is, in a normal state (when the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the front end of the start port door member 1214 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, as shown in FIG. It is in a state where it is sunk. In the state of being in such a sunk position, even if the game ball T flows down between the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start port region left standing wall portion 1161m, the game ball T is not started. The upper surface of the mouth door member 1214 (the first guide portion 1214a or the like) cannot be rolled, and flows down onto the second start port region lower shelf portion 1161i disposed on the lower side as it is.

  On the other hand, when a normal win is obtained in the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134, the front end of the start port door member 1214 is turned on the base plate by energizing the start port solenoid 1215. Projecting forward from the front surface of 1160.

  That is, in a state where the front end of the start port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (a state where the second start port 1153 can be received), the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the second start port region left When the game ball T flows down between the standing wall portion 1161m, the game ball T comes into contact with the upper surface (bottom surface) of the first guide portion 1214a (starter door member 1214). In this respect, since the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side becomes higher, the game ball T is guided to the right side where the second start port 1153 is provided by this inclination. .

  Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide part 1214a further rolls on the second guide part 1214b on the right side thereof. Since the bottom surface of the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the increase in the rolling speed of the game ball T is slowed, but thus the second guide portion 1214b is moved to the right. The rolled game ball T further rolls to the third guide portion 1214c on the right side thereof.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is lowered toward the rear side where the opening as the second start port 1153 is provided. In addition, a front wall portion 1214d that restricts the game ball T on the third guide portion 1214c from spilling from the front is formed in front of the third guide portion 1214c, and the right side of the third guide portion 1214c. On the other side, a standing wall portion 1214e is formed which abuts and regulates the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b so that the game ball T does not flow down to the right as it is.

  Therefore, when the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b is supplied to the third guide portion 1214c, the game ball T comes into contact with the front wall portion 1214d and the standing wall portion 1214e and While the movement is regulated, the third guide portion 1214c is received into the opening as the second start port 1153 by the inclination of the bottom surface.

  According to such a configuration, when the start opening solenoid 1215 is energized, the start opening door member 1214 moves forward, passes through the second start opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, and passes through the first guide section. 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is released to the left from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, the first guide of the starting port door member 1214 is brought into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m. It abuts on the portion 1214a, and the flow direction is directed rightward by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a through the second guide portion 1214b to the third guide portion 1214c, and the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 11611l of the front flow path forming member 1161 Thus, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second starting port 1153 opening rearward.

  When the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 by the detection signal, and the payout is made. The control board 4110 controls the prize ball device 740 to pay out the number (for example, one) of game balls T corresponding to the received payout command to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the energization to the start port solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a that has been immersed by the urging force of the coil spring provided in the start port solenoid 1215 protrudes, and the start port door member 1214 moves backward via the link member 1216. To do. When the start opening door member 1214 is retracted in this manner, the protruding amounts of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decrease (start opening door). The gap between the front end of the member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 102) in the front flow path forming member 1161 gradually increases. That is, in this case, when there is a game ball T rolling on the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b in the start port door member 1214, there is a gap between the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a. At a stage where the diameter of the game ball T has been expanded beyond the diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T spills out from the gap. However, at this time, if there is a game ball T that has reached the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c before the gap expands beyond the diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T is not connected to the front wall portion 1214d or the standing wall. Upon receiving guidance from the part 1214e, both the third guiding part 1214c and the third starting part 1214c are received into the opening as the second starting port 1153.

  As described above, the second start opening 1153 according to this embodiment is provided as a remote island type winning opening provided at a position away from the flow path where the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. Yes. In addition, it can appear and retreat by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and is one of a position where it sank (see FIG. 122 (a)) and an appearance position (see FIG. 122 (b)). When in the appearance position, the game ball T is provided as a bridge passage connecting the flow path and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type prize opening), and the game ball T on the flow path is different from the depth direction (right direction) ) Is provided with a start port door member 1214 (tonbolo type movable member) provided so as to roll to the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port).

  Accordingly, the starter door member 1214 can secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the game ball T until it is received by the second starter port 1153 (remote island type winning port). It is possible to distinguish between the operation that allows the bridging of the sphere T and the operation that does not allow it to be used strictly. As a result, unlike the conventional case where a structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the operated movable piece due to inertia, a prize is rarely generated even though the operation is not allowed. It can be avoided reliably.

  That is, only the bridging time shorter than the winning threshold time required for the game ball T on the flow down path to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting rolling at the first guide portion 1214a. If the control for energizing the start opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the start opening door member 1214 is not protruded, the second start opening 1153 is not operated even though the start opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted (unacceptable operation, unfavorable game mode). That is, in this case, even if the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b (start port door member 1214) by the operation of the start port door member 1214 to the appearance position, the game ball T Are the front ends of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214) that are retracted before reaching the third guide portion 1214c, and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow path forming member 1161. It will spill from the gap between.

  On the other hand, the bridge time longer than the winning threshold time required for the game ball T on the flow path to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting rolling at the first guide portion 1214a. If the control for energizing the start opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the start opening door member 1214 protrudes over the second start opening 1153 when the start opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to allow the game ball T to be received (allowing operation, advantageous game mode). In other words, in this case, the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214) has the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b (starting port door member 1214). It becomes possible to reach the third guide portion 1214c at an earlier stage than the backward movement. The game ball that has arrived at the third guide portion 1214c in this way is received into the opening portion as the second start port 1153 due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c. At this time, even if the third guide portion 1214c (start-up door member 1214) starts to retract, the inertial force acting on the game ball T is received by contact with the front wall portion 1214d. The second start port 1153 can be received without spilling from the third guide portion 1214c.

  Only by controlling the operation time of the start port door member 1214, the game ball T can be more reliably awarded to the second start port 1153 when the start port door member 1214 is operated, and the start port door member. The more reliable non-winning of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 when the 1214 is operated can be used properly according to the game situation. This makes it possible to realize a bold game design based on the premise that no winning is achieved when the start door member 1214 is positioned at the appearance position only for a short bridging time.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, the first guide portion 1214a when the start door member 1214 moves backward on the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). The portion in which the second guide portion 1214b is accommodated is formed only as a small hole that can be accommodated. That is, in this case, while the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b is gradually reduced by the retreat of the start door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b The game ball T rolling on the upper surface is naturally drawn toward the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4), but the game ball T drawn in this way is the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Since it rolls to the right while being pressed against the front wall surface (or more strongly than when stationary at the appearance position), it makes contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). The braking force can be applied to the speed of rolling to the right by the corresponding frictional force of a predetermined value or more (or the frictional force stronger than when stationary at the appearance position).

  As described above, at the stage where the start opening of the start opening door member 1214 is started and the winning to the second start opening 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) Since a system has been constructed in which a brake is automatically applied to the speed toward the second start port 1153 by the frictional force according to the contact, the start port member 1214 is moved backward (from the appearance position to the position where it has been sunk). The number of game balls that reach the second starting port 1153 after the start of (displacement) can be reduced, thereby preventing a non-winning when performing an operation that does not allow the game balls T to be bridged. Certainty increases.

  Note that the starting port door member 1214 according to this embodiment has a structure that moves forward and backward, so that when viewed from the player (front side), the starting port door member 1214 is moving forward or backward. It is difficult to determine whether it is. For this reason, the start opening door depends on whether or not the game ball T actually flows down between the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, thereby contacting the start opening door member 1214. It is necessary to recognize the advance / retreat of the member 1214, and the player makes a right turn so that the game ball T flows between the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the second start opening area left standing wall 1161m. It is possible to focus attention on the movement of the game ball T and to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the start port door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second start port upper shelf 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the start port door member 1214 is left on the second start port upper shelf 1161j. The game ball T that rolls in the direction toward the right and comes in contact with the second start port area left standing wall 1161m from the left end of the second start port upper shelf 1161j and then contacts the first guide 1212a and is guided to the right. The movement becomes a movement that makes a U-turn suddenly, and can attract the player's interest strongly (see FIGS. 122 (b) and 123 (b)).

  Further, in the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, etc., only one game ball T is opened to the front in such a size that only one game ball T can be received. Immediately above the second start port 1153, the second start port upper shelf 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 is disposed. The second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is about three times as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lower, and the higher right end side is the second starting port. 1153 is disposed immediately above. That is, the left end portion side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j extends to the left side of the second starting port 1153. Further, in the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, the difference in height between the right end portion side and the left end portion side is set to about 約 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  On the left outer side from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, a second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m extending vertically with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is disposed. The second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m has an upper end located above the left end of the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance of about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and a lower end thereof. The upper shelf portion 1161j extends vertically so as to be positioned above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 at a distance lower than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the upper left end of the upper shelf portion 1161j.

  The start opening door member 1214 has a space at which only one game ball T can circulate between the second start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j so that only one game ball T can flow. Arranged below the upper shelf 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

[2-2C. About the special downflow passage leading to the accessory winning award 1155 formed by the base plate 1160 and the front flow path forming member 1161]
As described above, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat plate 1160 into the front game area 1100 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, and the flat front plate portion 1161a. Is provided in the form of a shallow box with the rear side open, and a special downflow passage for the game ball T communicating with the base plate 1160 to the prize winning hole 1155 is formed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 99, the special downflow passage has two passages X and Y formed so as to sandwich the general winning opening 1151, and the right-handed game ball T is placed in the passage X. , Y, a specific rolling area that can be received into the prize winning opening 1155 (here, an area that is directly above (such as the upper surface of) the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 when closed) ) To reach.

  However, in the passage X on the left side with respect to the general winning opening 1151, a structure in which the game ball T flowing down the passage X is guided slightly to the right by the thick portion of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e. It is formed with. The passage Y on the right side of the general winning opening 1151 also guides the game ball T flowing down the passage Y downward to the left by the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c, but the receiving portion 1161b. It is formed with a structure that stops the movement in the left direction by making contact with a portion formed so as to extend vertically downward.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball T that has been hit to the right is brought into a closed state after at least having a speed in the left direction (or in a state having a slight speed in the left direction). It can be supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

  In this regard, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 according to this embodiment is provided as a flat door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side and the back side are lowered, as will be described later. On the other hand, in the special downflow passage, the game ball T passing through either of the passages X and Y does not have a speed in the left direction (or has a slight speed in the left direction). In such a state, it is provided so as to be supplied to the right side portion (the most upstream portion of the specific rolling region) of the accessory prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

  According to such a configuration, any game ball T that reaches the right side of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is left regardless of the flow speed of the game ball T or the strength at the time of launch. From the state in which the speed in the direction (initial speed) is substantially “0”, rolling in the left direction (more precisely, in the back left direction) is started slowly by its own weight. Therefore, not only can the time during which the game ball T stays on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) be increased, but also the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 corresponding to the elimination of variations in initial speed. Variations in the speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the (door portion 1221a) can be made difficult to occur.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100, the special downflow passage according to this embodiment causes the leftward roll on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) due to its own weight. A structure (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k and the front side regulating portion 1161k) that regulates the slowly starting game ball T so that the rolling speed does not exceed a predetermined speed value due to the inclination of the upper surface. To have.

  That is, in the special flow path according to this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in a specific rolling region). ) Is L (for example, 6 cm), and the time of the firing interval when the game ball T is continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds). ) Rolls in the passage so that the average speed (preferably maximum speed) of the game balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is less than “L / 2T”. It is provided as a structure associated with the game ball T to be played.

  According to such a configuration, as long as the player continues to be right-handed, at least two (2, 3) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is provided. A game ball can be made to exist.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 100, and FIG. 125, the special downflow passage is on the left side of the upper surface (specific rolling region) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). A base plate side regulating portion 1160k formed as three protrusions that are engaged with the game ball T rolling in the direction from the base plate 1160 side and decelerate the speed, and a front flow path with respect to the game ball T A front-side regulating portion 1161k formed as two protrusions that are engaged from the forming member 1161 side and decelerate the speed.

  Here, the base plate side regulating portion 1160k (three projections on the base plate 1160 side) and the front side regulation portion 1161k (two projections on the front channel forming member 1161 side) are as shown in FIG. Are provided so as to face each other with the above-mentioned prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) sandwiched therebetween. And as above-mentioned, the upper surface of the said prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) inclines so that the left side and the back side may become low, respectively.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the game ball T1 that has slowly started rolling in the rear left direction on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is first placed on the base plate 1160 side. By coming into contact with the protrusion (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k) on the right side of the three protrusions, the speed in the left direction is reduced and guided to the near side. That is, the inclination to the far side of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) is so gentle that the game ball T can be guided to the near side by the base plate side regulating portion 1160k.

  In this way, the game ball T1 guided to the near side by the base plate side restricting portion 1160k is combined with the leftward inclination of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) itself, and the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part) On the upper surface of 1221a), rolling in the left front direction is started slowly. As a result, the contact with the protrusion on the right side of the two protrusions on the front channel forming member 1161 side (the front side regulating portion 1161k) reduces the speed in the left direction again and increases the depth. Be guided to the side.

  That is, according to the base plate side regulating portion 1160k (three projections on the base plate 1160 side) and the front side regulating portion 1161k (two projections on the front channel forming member 1161 side) according to this embodiment. The game ball T1 on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is rolled zigzag in the left direction while decelerating on the base plate 1160 side and the front flow path forming member 1161 side each time. Therefore, the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) can be managed so as not to exceed “L / 2T”. .

  As a result, while the game ball T1 is still rolling on the top surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a), the game that is fired next (after 0.6 seconds) in a right-handed manner. The ball T2 (further, the next game ball fired (after 1.2 seconds)) reaches the right side of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). Therefore, as long as the player continues to make a right strike, at least two (2, three) game balls may be present on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. become able to.

  In addition, since it is possible to play such that at least two or more game balls T are habitually present in a specific rolling area, a plurality of games are played each time the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened. An excellent winning performance such that the ball T can win a prize is realized, and this makes it possible to give a sense of speed to the winning situation at the prize winning opening 1155.

  As will be described later, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) according to this embodiment has a plurality of gaming balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) almost simultaneously. The game ball T slides in a direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls T so as to spill into the prize winning opening 1155. As a result, each time the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the game ball T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 has an internal region of the prize winning opening 1155 regardless of the number of the game balls T. As a result, it will be possible to enter all of the prizes at once, so that the winning situation at the prize winning opening 1155 can be given even more speed, and at the same time, a collective award can be obtained (paid out). You can expect.

  Although not shown in the drawings, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, a thick portion is formed at a portion where the passages X and Y on the front-side flow path forming member 1161 side are joined. The game ball T that has flowed down one of the passages X and Y by the thick portion is guided to the back side, and the speed of the game ball T itself is reduced, so that the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion) The movement of the game ball T on the upper surface of 1221a) is further stabilized. As a result, the average speed of the game balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is less likely to vary, and the right side of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a). The game ball T1 that has reached the portion can be more reliably brought into contact with a protrusion on the right side of the three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k).

  According to such a special downflow passage, when the bonus winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is in the closed state, the gaming balls T that are sequentially reached by the hitting by the hitting ball launching device 650 are related to the bonus winning opening opening / closing member. It is possible to increase the number of game balls T that are placed on the top surface (specific rolling region) of 1221 (the door portion 1221a) and wait for a prize in the prize winning opening 1155 with the passage of time. It becomes like this.

  In the special downflow passage according to this embodiment, the game ball T that first reaches the specific rolling area is the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the above-mentioned accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a). ) To the left, the two game balls are provided so as to reach a specific rolling area. Therefore, the number of game balls T that are in a waiting state for winning in the prize winning opening 1155 can be increased to a maximum of three as time passes.

  Incidentally, in the gaming ball T (the gaming ball T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221) that is in a waiting state for the prize winning opening 1155 in this way, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened. When winning, the prize winning opening 1155 is spilled from the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming ball T that is in the waiting state for winning can be obtained even if the operation time is extremely short as long as the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 moves to the open state. It becomes possible to enter the inside area of the accessory prize winning opening 1155. In addition, since the game ball T that has already been launched (the game ball T that is waiting for a prize) automatically enters the internal area of the accessory winning award 1155, the winning award winning opening It is possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball T into the internal area of 1155. In other words, it is possible to accurately control the winning time as well as eliminating the possibility of non-winning to the prize winning port 1155 by opening control while there is a game ball that is in a waiting state for winning. It becomes like this.

[2-2D. Schematic configuration of accessory unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the prize opening unit 1150 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. The accessory unit 1220 includes an accessory winning port 1155 that allows the game ball T to be received according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball T at the first start port 1152 and the second start port 1153. The winning ball winning unit 1220A and the winning ball 1155 of the winning character winning unit 1220A are provided so that the game ball T can flow down the inner area, and the gaming ball T can be received by distribution. A V winning opening unit 1220B having a V winning opening 1156.

[2-2D1. Award winning unit]
An accessory winning unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 supports an accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 for opening and closing the accessory winning port 1155, and an accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. An upper housing 1222 that divides both left and right ends of the mouth 1155, a lower housing 1223 that is attached to the lower side of the upper housing 1222 and that receives the game ball T received by the accessory prize winning opening 1155, and is attached to the lower housing 1223 An accessory winning prize sensor 1224 for detecting the game ball T received in the cage winning prize winning opening 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and moving forward and backward according to the gaming state are provided. A prize winning solenoid 1225 and a plunger 1225 of the prize winning solenoid 1225 A link member 1226 that slides the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 by transmitting the advance / retreat of the opening, and an opening / closing detection sensor 1227 that detects opening / closing of the prize winning opening 1155 by detecting the movement of the link member 1226. Yes.

  The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A has a flat door 1212a extending in the left and right directions with a constant width and inclined so that the left side in front view is lowered, and the door An extending piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end of the center in the left-right direction of 1221a, and a connecting hole 1221c penetrating vertically near the front end of the extending piece 1221b and extending left and right. .

  The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning port unit 1220A has a box-shaped upper housing body 1222a in which a prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is placed on the upper surface and the lower side is opened, and the front from the left and right ends at the front end of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of flat partition pieces 1222b projecting upward and downward and front and rear, and left and right ends of the upper front portion of the upper housing main body 1222a are formed at the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221. A pair of groove-like first support portions 1222c that slidably support the upper housing body 1222c between the pair of first support portions 1222c and an opening 1222d that extends vertically and extends back and forth. An extension piece formed in the upper rear portion of the upper housing main body 1222a and in the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 A groove-shaped pair of second support portion 1222e of the left and right ends of 221b slidably supported, and a. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b coincide.

  The lower housing 1223 of the prize winning unit 1220A has a box shape with the upper side open, and extends to the left and right at the front side of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 with the same length as the interval between the pair of partition pieces 1222b. A ball receiving portion 1223a that is lowered toward the left and lowered toward the rear near the left end, a notch 1223b that is formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a notch 1223b A sensor support portion 1223c, which is formed in a shallow box shape that is formed on the rear side and the lower side and is open on the upper side, and in which the accessory winning award sensor 1224 is fitted, and a bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c penetrates vertically. A discharge port 1223d through which a game ball detected by the winning port sensor 1224 can pass and a right rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a A box-shaped solenoid housing portion 1223e in which an accessory winning solenoid 1225 is housed, and a left side of the solenoid housing portion 1223e (a central rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a). A link accommodating portion 1223f that accommodates rotatably.

  The prize winning solenoid 1225 of the prize winning unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a advances and retreats from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 is formed in a disk shape with a large diameter at the tip. The prize winning solenoid 1225 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1225a protrudes (extends) due to the urging force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1226 of the prize winning unit 1220A is rotatably supported at the bottom of the link housing portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends to the left and right, and the upper housing 1222 extends from the rotating shaft 1226a. A band plate-like collar portion 1226b that extends to the upper side of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a through the opening 1222d of the upper portion, and a columnar shape that is formed in a column shape that extends to the left and right at the upper end of the collar portion 1226b. A connecting portion 1226c inserted into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 from the lower side, and protrudes to the right at a position closer to the lower side from the upper and lower center of the flange portion 1226b and engages with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225a. Engaging portion 1226d between the engaging portion 1226d of the flange portion 1226b and the rotating shaft portion 1226a. And a, a detection piece 1226e detected by and close detection sensor 1227 extends to put al rearward.

  In the normal state (when no power is supplied), the winning combination winning unit 1220A of the present embodiment is such that the plunger 1225a of the winning combination solenoid 1225 protrudes forward by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the tip of the plunger 1225a Due to the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 engaged with, the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is in a state of rising substantially vertically from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 having the connection hole 1221c into which the connection portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pushed forward by the connection portion 1226c through the connection hole 1221c. As a result, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid forward.

  Thereby, the door part 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 protrudes forward from the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door part 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the partition piece 1222b of the upper housing 1222. Is in position. In addition, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning award opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b that are spaced apart from each other in the upper housing 1222. Therefore, the prize winning opening 1155 opened upward is closed by the door 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 and the game ball T cannot be received (FIG. 124 (b). ) Etc.). In this state, the game ball T flowing down on the door portion 1221a rolls leftward and is discharged leftward from the left end of the door portion 1221a according to the door portion 1221a inclined so that the left side is lowered. The In a state in which the prize winning opening 1155 is closed by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the prize winning solenoid unit 1220A is energized to the prize winning solenoid 1225 according to the special lottery result that is drawn when the game balls T are received by the first start opening 1152 and the second start opening 1153, the plunger 1225a Move backwards to immerse. When the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled backward. Thereby, the link member 1226 rotates in the direction in which the upper end of the flange portion 1226b moves rearward around the rotation shaft portion 1226a. And since the connection part 1226c of the upper end of the collar part 1226b will move back, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 will slide back through the connection hole 1221c in which the connection part 1226c is inserted. .

  At this time, the engagement portion 1226d of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has the length (height) of the flange portion 1226b extending from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. Since the rotation shaft portion 1226a is arranged at the center rather than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b largely moves backward with respect to the movement amount of the plunger 1225a backward. Accordingly, the front end of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear ends of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the prize winning opening 1155 The game ball T is opened upward to be able to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In a state where the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is retracted and the prize winning opening 1155 is opened to be accepted, when the gaming ball T is received by the prize winning opening 1155, the gaming ball T It passes between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223, and rolls left on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, the ball receiving portion 1223a is discharged from the rear left notch 1223b to the rear, and is detected by the accessory prize port sensor 1224 supported on the lower side behind the notch 1223b. From the discharge port 1223d of 1223, it discharges | emits on the ball | bowl inlet 1238d of the ball | bowl guide member 1238 mentioned later of the V prize port unit 1220B below.

  However, as will be described later, in the prize winning port unit 1220A according to this embodiment, the prize winning opening 1155 is awarded when the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the opened state. The game ball T that has entered the internal area is detected by the bonus game prize sensor 1224, compared to the time required for all the game balls T to enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 to be entered. It is formed with an internal passage that takes a longer time to reach the position. In this way, the detection location where the game ball T that has entered the internal region is used for the closing determination of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (upper limit determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). A plurality of game balls T that are in a waiting state for winning a prize at the prize winning port 1155 are regularly added by making all the game balls T that are in a waiting state for winning finish entering before reaching Combined with the above-mentioned configuration that is created automatically, it is possible to actively generate an overflow winning for the upper limit of the gaming ball T that can be won, and dynamic winning performance exceeding the set value, winning performance Can be realized.

[2-2D2. V prize opening unit]
The V prize slot unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the accessory prize slot unit 1220A and has a unit front base 1230 in which a V prize slot 1156 is formed, and a unit front base 1230. A rear unit base 1231 attached to the rear side, a V-winning solenoid 1232 having a plunger 1232a that is sandwiched between the front unit base 1230 and the rear unit base 1231 and moves forward and backward according to the gaming state; A drive gear member 1233 that is rotatably supported by the front unit base 1230 on the rear side and rotates by the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232, a driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear member 1233, and a driven gear member 1234. The rear end is mounted in the center of Front while being rotatably supported by and unit before the base 1230 is provided with a shaft member 1235 which projects forward from the unit before the base 1230.

  The V prize opening unit 1220B is disposed on the front surface of the unit front base 1230 and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and includes a receiving portion 1236a capable of receiving only one game ball T on the peripheral surface. A columnar rotating body 1236, a disk-shaped rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotating body 1236, and a front part of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 And a ball guiding member 1238 for guiding the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guiding the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning opening 1156. .

  Further, the V prize opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a pair of specific sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V prize opening 1156 and the rear side of the unit front base 1230. A V-losing sensor 1240 that detects a game ball T that is attached and received by the accessory winning prize opening 1155 but not received by the V winning opening 1156, and a rotating body 1236 that is attached to the rear side of the unit rear base 1231. And a rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the motor.

  The unit front base 1230 of the V prize opening unit 1220B has a front surface 1230a in which the V prize opening 1156 penetrates back and forth on the right side in front of the center with a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and near the center of the front surface part 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b for pivotally supporting the shaft member 1235, and a loss hole 1230c that penetrates forward and backward on the bearing hole 1230b and allows the game ball T to pass therethrough. .

  The unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a, guides the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156i downward, and opens the rear side of the first discharge path 1230d. A second discharge path 1230e that is formed on the rear surface and that guides the game ball T that has passed through the lost hole 1230c downward and is open on the rear side, and is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a and above the first discharge path 1230d. And a solenoid accommodating portion 1230f in which a cage V winning solenoid 1232 is accommodated. A pair of specific sensors 1239 are attached in the first discharge path 1230d. A V-loss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge path 1230e. The opened rear side of the first discharge path 1230d, the second discharge path 1230e, and the solenoid housing portion 1230f is closed by the unit rear base 1231.

  The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a advances and retreats from the lower end side. The plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at the tip. Further, the V winning solenoid 1232 includes a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232a in a protruding direction, and the plunger 1232a protrudes downward when the coil spring is not energized.

  The drive gear member 1233 of the V prize opening unit 1220B extends in the front-rear direction and has a shaft portion 1233a that is rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a plate-like shape extending from the shaft portion 1233a in a direction perpendicular to the shaft. An extension piece 1233b, a drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and projecting forward from the front surface of the extension piece 1233b and receiving a V prize An engaging portion 1233d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232a of the solenoid 1232.

  The driven gear member 1234 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is a driven gear 1234a that meshes with the drive gear of the drive gear member 1233. , And a detection piece 1234b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a. The driven gear 1234a extending in the arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 has a pitch diameter of about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the driving gear 1233c extending in the arc shape in the driving gear member 1233. Yes.

  The rotating body 1236 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is formed with a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T opened to the front and the outer periphery. In the front view, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 extends in a direction in which two sides (two sides spaced apart in the circumferential direction) from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side move away from each other toward the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is on the left side of the front view. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer peripheral side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of the rotating body 1236 is about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  In addition, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed to be substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side (see FIG. 124 (a)). In addition, the receiving portion 1236a has a rear wall notched from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side, and is formed lower than two sides that are separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a includes an inclined portion 1236b that is inclined obliquely on the front side (inner side) of the rear wall so as to be directed rearward as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis). When the game ball T flowing down from above comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b, the game ball T is guided forward to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a, and the receiving portion 1236a is received when the game ball T is received. The impact acting on the bottom of the can be reduced. Further, the opened front end side of the receiving portion 1236 a in the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Accordingly, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can allow the game ball T to be taken in and out only from the outside in the radial direction of the rotating body 1236.

  The ball guiding member 1238 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a so that the game ball T can pass therethrough. 1238b and a right part mouth 1238c that is formed by notching the right part of the peripheral wall part 1238a in front view (position of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction in front view with respect to the upper part 1238b) and through which a game ball can pass. A ball inlet 1238d that is disposed directly above the peripheral wall 1238a and immediately below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the accessory prize winning unit 1220A and opens upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d toward the upper opening 1238b. An upper guiding portion 1238e that is lowered and bent in a crank shape so that the game ball T can be circulated, and a right mouth 123 Front view lower right V game ball T has become lower toward the winning opening 1156 is provided with a right guiding section 1238f allowing flow c. From

  The ball guiding member 1238 is open at the rear end sides of the upper guiding portion 1238e and the right guiding portion 1238f, and is attached to the unit front base 1230, whereby the rear end side opened by the front surface portion 1230a is closed.

  In the V prize opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is supported on the unit front base 1230 so as to be rotatable at a position slightly above the vertical center near the right end in front view. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is attached to the unit base 1230 so as to be rotatable at a position slightly to the left of the front view center. The drive gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 are engaged between the shaft portion 1233a and the shaft member 1235 of the drive gear member 1233, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is disposed. Has been.

  The V prize opening unit 1220B is below the center of the rotating body 1236, and the V prize opening 1156 is opened forward at a position directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233.

  Energization / non-energization of the V winning solenoid 1232 is performed at a constant cycle under the control of the main control board 4100. When the V winning solenoid 1232 is in a non-energized state, the plunger 1232a protrudes downward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232a protruding downward, and the driving gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portion 1233a. In the vicinity of the end of the gear 1233c in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the end of the driven gear member 1234 is engaged with the vicinity of the end of the driven gear 1234a in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 120B). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 extends upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

  Then, the rotating member 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 faces the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right in the front view by the shaft member 1235 having the rear end side attached to the driven gear member 1234. It is in the state of the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is coincident with the right port 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a state of being built. Further, the upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238 is in a state of being closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

  Thereby, when a game ball is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right port 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230 and is detected by the pair of specific sensors 1239, and the lower end of the first discharge path 1230d. It is discharged downward from.

  On the other hand, the game ball T that has been received by the accessory prize winning opening 1155 of the accessory winning prize opening unit 120B and has reached the upper opening 1238b through the ball inlet 1238d and the upper guiding portion 1238e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from being received, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 that is inclined so that the rear end side is narrowed opens to the lower rear side of the upper guiding portion 1238e. The unit front base 1230 enters the loss hole 1230c of the front surface portion 1230a, is guided downward by the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, is detected by the V loss sensor 1240, and is detected by the second discharge path 1230e. It is discharged downward from the lower end of.

  In a state where the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises so as to be immersed against the urging force of the coil spring. As the plunger 1232a rises, the driving gear member 1233 rotates clockwise around the shaft 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. By rotating the drive gear member 1233 clockwise, the driven gear member 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 meshed with the drive gear 1233c causes the entire driven gear member 1234 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise around the shaft member 1235. Rotate. Accordingly, the rotating body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front via the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 on the rear end side. Become.

  Then, the rotating body 1236 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise, so that the receiving portion 1236a is opened upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodation position where it coincides with the upper port 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. Thereby, the receiving part 1236a will be in the state connected with the upper guide part 1238e via the upper opening 1238b (refer Fig.120 (a)).

  With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 facing upward, when the game ball is discharged from the prize winning unit 1220A side and enters the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, the upper portion passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e. It is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 from the mouth 1238b. In the state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, when the game ball further enters the ball entrance 138b, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guide portion 1238e and is received by the rotating body 1236. After coming into contact with the game ball T received by the portion 1236a from above, it enters the gap hole 1230c opened to the rear side, and is discharged downward through the second discharge portion 130e of the unit front base 1230. The

  At this time, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and even if the game ball T abuts from above, it can be detached from the receiving portion 1236a. Absent. Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center in the front-rear direction of the upper guiding portion 1238e) is formed slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T coming later comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball T can be guided to the rear where the loss hole 1230c is located, and another game ball T that has come later can be reliably discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operation state shown in FIG. 124A, first, the game supplied first among the game balls. The sphere is held by the receiving portion 1236a. Then, each game ball supplied after this enters the lose hole 1230c in a form guided by contact with the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a (V loss sensor 1240). Detected by). On the other hand, when the rotating body 1236 moves from the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the operating state shown in FIG. The holding is released and the vehicle enters the V prize opening 1156 (detected by the specific sensor 1239).

  On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotator 1236 in the operation state shown in FIG. 124 (b), the game balls are all guided by contact with the rotator 1236. It enters into the losing hole 1230c (detected by the V losing sensor 1240).

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the game area 1100, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle thereof. A center role 1130 is disposed at a substantially central position of the game area 1100. The design of the center role 1130 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  In addition, an effect display device 1115 that provides an effect display with a large area in front view so as to attract attention from the player is provided behind the center accessory 1130. As the effect display device 1115, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative symbol image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1115.

  On the other hand, in the game area 1100, from the right area to the lower area of the center bonus 1130, the gate member 1134, the general prize opening 1151, the prize winning prize 1155, the second start opening 1153, the first start opening 1152, and the big prize. A mouth 1154 is provided. However, among these, the first start opening 1152 is provided so that only the game ball T flowing down the left area of the center accessory 1130 can be awarded, and the big winning opening 1154 is provided on the left side of the center accessory 1130. A game ball T that has flowed down either the area or the right area is provided so that a prize can be won.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls 4 stored in the dish unit 300 are played one by one (at intervals of 0.6 seconds) on the game board 4. The upper part in the region 1100 can be driven. The game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass either the left or right of the center accessory 1130. As a result, when winning in any one of the winning openings, the number of game balls T corresponding to the accepted winning opening is paid out to the dish unit 300, but not in any winning opening. In this case, the game area 1100 is discharged from the out port 1112a opened at the lower end. Note that the game balls T discharged from the out port 1112a, the general winning port 1151, the first starting port 1152, the second starting port 1153, the big winning port 1154, and the prize winning port 1155 are not returned to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 1130, the center accessory 1130 is opened at the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction. The warp outlet 1132 is discharged again into the game area 1100. Immediately below the warp outlet 1132, the first starting port 1152 in the prize opening unit 1150 is always open upward, and the game ball T released from the warp outlet 1132 has a very high probability of being the first starting port. 1152 is accepted.

  Here, the first start port 1152 is substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100, and a game ball can always be received below the effect display device 1115. When a game ball enters the first start port 1152, the first start port sensor 1190 (FIG. 126) detects the game ball entering (winning). At this time, if it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined special start condition has been established, it is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a random number for one special symbol, a first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for a winning (small hit, big hit) that triggers the opening of the prize winning opening 1155 or the big winning opening 1154, The first special symbol that is dynamically displayed on one special symbol display 1185 (FIG. 126) is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The first special symbol indicator 1185 is provided as a part of the function indicator 1114, for example.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 in the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is set in a pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, an energizer solenoid 1204 in an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit, The big prize opening 1154 is opened (big hit game). Then, after the big hit game is performed, it is possible to control the transition to a later-described short-time game state in which the ease of accepting the game ball into the second start port 1153 is improved.

  As will be described later, when the first start port sensor 1190 detects that a game ball has been entered (winning), the main control board 4100 also transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 126). Do. That is, in this case, the payout control board 4110 causes the number of game balls T corresponding to the received payout command (for example, three) to be paid out to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 flows down from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 in the right direction (right hit), the game ball T enters the right channel 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center accessory 1130. Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e disposed at the approximate center in the vertical direction of the game area 1100. Below the discharge port 1133e, the general winning port 1151 of the winning port unit 1150 is always open upward.

  When the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 based on a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 4110 has a number (for example, 10) corresponding to the received payout command. The game ball T is paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T flowing down the right side of the center accessory 1130 and not received in the general winning opening 1151 passes through either the left or right of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door part 1221a of the accessory prize winning opening / closing member 1221 that closes the prize winning prize opening 1155 of the article unit 1220. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls to the left on the upper surface of the door portion 1221a below the top winning wall portion 1161f of the prize winning opening, and from the left end of the door portion 1221a It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf 1161g and is discharged from the left end of the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g to the lower left.

  Then, the game ball T released from the prize winning port left shelf 1161g flows down to the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, rolls left on the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, and It is discharged from the left end of the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j to the lower left. The game ball T released from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j abuts on the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m on the left side, and moves downward along the right side of the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m. Flow down. The game ball T that has flowed down along the right side of the second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m flows down onto the second starting port area lower shelf portion 1161i, and the upper surface of the second starting port region lower shelf portion 1161i is moved to the left. , The second start opening area lower shelf 1161i is discharged to the lower left so as to pass through the front face of the big winning opening 1154.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is received (passed) into the gate member 1134 in the right flow path 1133, it is detected by the later-described gate sensor 1135 (see FIG. 126). At this time, if it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined normal start condition is established, the normal (normally updated) is generated (eg, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for the symbol, a determination process (normal determination) is performed for the normal hit that triggers the operation of the start door member 1214 as a movable piece, and is dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 (FIG. 126). The normal symbol to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal winning is won, after the change display is finished, drive control of a later-described ordinary accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 126) configured with a start-up solenoid 1215 and the like is performed. Thereby, the operation to the appearance position of the start port door member 1214 is performed.

  However, as described above, the second start port 1153 and the start port door member 1214 according to this embodiment can accept the game ball T into the second start port 1153 even if the operation by the start port door member 1214 is performed. It is provided with a structure that is not necessarily allowed (remote island type prize opening, tomboro type movable member).

  That is, in the second start port 1153 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the start port door member 1214 is performed according to the normal winning, the bridging time is shorter than the winning threshold time. In the case where only the operation is performed, the game ball cannot cross the upper surface of the start port door member 1214 and spills, so that the second start port 1153 cannot be accepted. Therefore, the second start port 1153 according to this embodiment crosses the upper surface of the start port door member 1214 only when the operation by the start port door member 1214 is projected for a time longer than the winning threshold time. It is possible to allow the game ball T to be accepted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, even when the normal determination is won, the operating time of the start door member 1214 is determined from the winning threshold time. Even a short bridge time is selected. In this way, by completely eliminating the possibility that a game ball T that can be received by the second start port 1153 by crossing the start port door member 1214 when in the normal gaming state is generated, the second start port 1153 side The lottery can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the normal win is won by the normal determination in the short-time gaming state, the operating time of the start door member 1214 is a bridge longer than the winning threshold time. The time is always selected. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the player places a game ball in the right area of the center bonus 1130 in the gaming area 1100 (right-handed), and the second on the side that is regarded as a very advantageous gaming condition. It becomes possible to enjoy a game (second special symbol lottery) according to the reception of the game ball at the start port 1153.

  When a game ball is received at the second start port 1153, a second start port sensor 1191 (see FIG. 126) described later detects the game ball winning (winning). At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, a prize is awarded based on a random number for the second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for the hit (small hit, big hit) that is the opening opportunity of the mouth 1155 and the big winning opening 1154, and the second special symbol display 1186 (FIG. 126) is dynamically displayed. The displayed second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol display 1186 is provided as a part of the function display 1114, for example.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 in the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is set in a pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after the fluctuation display is finished, an energizer solenoid 1204 in an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit, The big prize opening 1154 is opened (big hit game).

  Here, in the small hit game, the V winning solenoid 1232 is de-energized in a state where any of the game balls that have entered the inner region of the winning prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the rotator 1236 rotates clockwise, the game ball received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotator 1236 is guided to the V winning opening 1156. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, in addition to the case where the big win is won, the big win game is started also when the specific sensor 1239 detects that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. Therefore, control for opening and closing the special winning opening 1154 in a predetermined pattern is performed.

  In the big hit game, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the grand prize opening 1154 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls have won the grand prize opening 1154. When the opening / closing control pattern for controlling the grand prize winning opening 1154 to be closed based on the game is a round game of one round, this round game is executed so as to repeat over the number of rounds corresponding to the type of “big hit” It will be.

  In the course of these games, when a game ball is received at the big prize opening 1154 or the winning combination prize opening 1155, the main control board 4100 shows the result of detection by the big winning prize sensor 1206 or the winning combination prize opening sensor 1224. Based on this, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110. As a result, the payout control board 4110 causes the number of game balls (for example, 10) according to the received payout command to be paid out to the dish unit 300.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the display by the function indicator 1114, the peripheral control board 4010 displays various effect images on the effect display device 1115 based on the command from the main control board 4100. It is displayed so that the player can be entertained.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, as an advantageous game condition described above that can be set for the lottery on the second start port 1153 side, a big hit game is played in the second special symbol lottery. The probability of getting a winning hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) is 10 times higher than the probability of getting a big hit game (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the first special symbol lottery. It is supposed to be set to.

  That is, in this case, when the bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is selected as the operation time of the start door member 1214, in the short game state, the lottery for the hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) for starting the big hit game Will be performed with a high probability (second special symbol lottery).

  Moreover, for the second special symbol random number (highly accurate start information) acquired on the second start port 1153 side, a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is selected as the operation time of the start port member 1214. Despite being acquired only when it is played (when it is in the short-time gaming state) and can be stored, even after this is finished, the memory itself is a predetermined number (the number of reserved special symbols) Can hold up to 4).

  Therefore, prior to the end of the short-time gaming state, the random number for the second special symbol (highly accurate starting information) is left in a suspended state up to a predetermined number, so that the number of the reserved game is Since the probability of getting a big hit game is increased even after being controlled to the state, it will be possible to draw lots, so the gaming interest will be reduced when the short-time game state ends Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as the type, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) The advantage that a big hit game can be started as long as the game (the right-handed game is continued) so that the state where the game ball exists on the upper surface (a specific rolling area) (waiting for winning) is maintained. The win is always selected.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, as a result of the second special symbol lottery based on the random number (highly accurate start information) for the second special symbol, a small hit (advantageous) If a small hit) is obtained, the control for prompting the player to win a game ball to the second start port 1153 is performed until the opening period of the prize winning port 1155 corresponding to the small hit ends. . In other words, in this case, since the big hit game can be started after the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery is secured up to the upper limit value, the transition to the normal game state is controlled after the big hit game is performed. Even if it is a case, a lottery can be performed for the number of holdings with a high probability of obtaining a big hit game even after being controlled to the normal gaming state. .

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the short-time game state, the second special symbol lottery (the game on the side where the probability of obtaining a hit for starting the big hit game is high) As a result, after the big hit game is performed, the short game state is temporarily terminated without continuing. On the other hand, prior to the end of the short-time gaming state, when the random number for the second special symbol (highly accurate start information) is left in the pending state, after the transition control to the normal gaming state After the jackpot game is played as a result of the digestion of the second special symbol lottery that has already been put on hold (the game on the side where the probability of winning the jackpot game is increased), the short game The transition is controlled again to the state.

  That is, in this case, even if the transition control to the short-time gaming state is performed, it is almost certain that the big hit game is performed as a result of the second special symbol lottery at a relatively early stage and that the short-time gaming state is once ended. (In the second special symbol lottery, the probability is more than 10 times higher than the probability obtained per winning the jackpot game in the first special symbol lottery). Therefore, if the player wins when the big hit game is started in the normal game state, the player can immediately obtain the big hit game at the time of the selection and the transition control to the short-time game state according to the sense of the player. Two big hit games with the big hit game that is expected to be provided will be provided as one set of big hit games.

  Then, each time a set of big hit games (two big hit games) is provided, the game is returned to the normal game state. However, in the normal game state, the second game is put on hold when in the short-time game state. It is possible to digest a special symbol lottery (a game on the side where the probability of obtaining a big hit game is high). In other words, the game on the side (second special symbol lottery) on the side that has a high probability of getting a big hit game while being in the normal game state can be digested by the number of reserves, Is it possible to win the start of the big hit game before the end of the number of times of the holding number and to control the transition again to the short-time game state (one set of big hit games (two big hit games) ) Can be started again, and so on.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability of obtaining an advantageous small hit in the second special symbol lottery is “1/6”, and the upper limit value of the number of reserves in the second special symbol lottery is Since it is “4”, in the normal gaming state that is returned every time the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is provided, the four second special symbol lotteries that are already on hold are digested. The probability of winning the jackpot game while starting the game is “671/1296” (= 1− (5/6) 4) even if the probability of winning the jackpot is excluded.

  In this way, the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) has the ability to loop with a probability of 50% or more (basically, the ability to continue the advantageous state). In the normal gaming state, including the period until the second special symbol lottery is over, the period after the transition control to the short-time gaming state is positioned as a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Will be able to. According to such a special gaming state, every time the special gaming state is succeeded with a probability of 50% or more (in the normal gaming state, the four second special symbol lotteries in the holding state are digested. (Every time you win a big hit game in between), you will be able to win the amount of prizes according to the two big hit games. It will be possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  However, the result of the first special symbol lottery (the first big hit, the first advantageous small hit) when in the short-time gaming state while providing such a set of big hit games (two big hit games) When the big hit game corresponding to the game starts, the game is controlled again to the short-time game state after the big hit game (see FIG. 141). In other words, in this case, at least three jackpot games including the jackpot game corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery will be played, and such a premium game can suppress a decrease in game entertainment. It becomes like this. In addition, in the big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery (first big hit, first advantageous small hit), only about 400 game balls can be obtained. While realizing a premium game, if the game on the first special symbol lottery side is deliberately advanced while in the short-time game state, it is disadvantageous to the player side, so there is no load on the hall side It is like that.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small win is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as the type, the upper surface (specification) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is specified. If you play the game (continue the right-handed game) so that the game ball is present in the (rolling area) (waiting for winning), you will always have an advantageous small hit that can start a big hit game. As described above, it is selected.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the principle that a big hit game can be started when an advantageous small hit is obtained will be described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as long as the player continues to be right-handed, the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) in the closed state (a specific part) A structure that allows at least one or more game balls (a few in this case) to continue to exist in the rolling region) is employed. On the other hand, when at least one game ball is present on the upper surface (specific rolling region) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) in the closed state, the prize winning opening opening / closing is performed. When the member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) is moved to the open state, the game balls spill from the upper surface of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) to the inner region of the accessory prize opening 1155. It is designed to enter.

  According to such a configuration, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion) can be used even if the operation time is extremely short as long as the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 moves to the open state. It becomes possible to allow a game ball (a game ball in a waiting state for winning a prize) existing on the upper surface of 1221a) to enter the internal region of the accessory prize winning opening 1155. In addition, game balls that have already been fired (game balls that are waiting for a prize) automatically enter the interior area of the prize winning slot 1155. It is possible to more accurately control the timing of the game ball entering the internal area.

  In this regard, in the inner region of the bonus winning award 1155, as will be described later, a certain distribution operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears from a specific timing (here, symbol stop timing). Accordingly, a rotating body (distribution device) 1236 capable of guiding the game ball that has entered the internal region to either the V prize opening 1156 or the loss hole 1230c is provided. That is to say, with respect to such a sorting operation of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236, the entry timing by the game ball to the inner area of the accessory winning prize opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. At the timing of being guided to 1156, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is moved from the closed state to the open state so that the waiting state for the game ball is released.

  According to such a configuration, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous small hit, the game is placed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). As long as the game is continued (right-handed game is continued) so that the state where the ball is present (waiting for winning) is maintained (see FIG. 142 (e)), the rotating body (vibration) Since the game ball enters the internal area of the accessory prize winning opening 1155 at an accurate timing guided to the V winning opening 1156 by the minute device 1236, the big hit game corresponding to the acceptance to the V winning opening 1156 Can be started (big hit control). This makes it possible to start a big win game not only when a big win is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery but also when an advantageous small win is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, through the setting of the probability obtained for the advantageous small win in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability for starting the big hit game with respect to the first special symbol lottery is increased to a high probability exceeding 10 times. Will be able to.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, basically, in order to be able to control the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 more accurately, basically, Only the game balls that are already in a state of waiting for winning on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) can enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. Only for a short time (short time in which a game ball that is not waiting for winning a prize is rejected), the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, such time (time for operating the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state) is at least shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Therefore, it is required to make it difficult for a new game ball to be supplied while the game is open.

  As a result, it is difficult for the game ball winning timing to vary when opening the prize winning opening 1155, and therefore a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in which a certain sorting operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears. Thus, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the internal region while it is determined in advance which of the V winning opening 1156 and the lost hole 1230c is to be guided.

  As will be described later, the probability of obtaining a big hit in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment is extremely low (1/400), and the probability of obtaining a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is also The probability is about the same (7/1200). However, in the second special symbol lottery, the big win is the same as the first special symbol lottery, and the winning probability is 1/400. The winning probability is more than 10 times higher than the winning probability (for example, 1/6). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are on hold, the second special symbol lottery is digested first regardless of the holding order.

  According to such a configuration, in the short-time gaming state, a game centered on the second special symbol lottery on the side of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery that has a very high winning probability ( Furthermore, the game of the second special symbol lottery side) is progressed, and as a result of such progress, normally, an advantageous small hit is immediately obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. Then, the number of the second special symbol lottery held up to the upper limit as a result of the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1153 before the end of the opening period of the prize winning port 1155 corresponding to the advantageous small win When the game ball that has already been launched and is waiting for a prize is guided to the V prize opening 1156 while the value has been secured, By playing a game), a big hit game corresponding to this can be generated.

  When an advantageous small hit is obtained, a small hit game that opens the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 at the timing when a game ball that has already been launched and is waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156. Because it is possible to generate a big hit game according to this, it is a privilege game that can win a large amount of prizes for such a small hit game and a corresponding big hit game May be provided to the player.

  However, every time a small winning (advantageous small winning) is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, if a high V winning probability that a game ball is accepted at the V winning opening 1156 is simply realized, the “winning prize” Machine lottery with a V prize opening 1156, such as “providing game play based on a machine lottery such as whether or not a game ball is accepted by the V prize opening 1156 with a predetermined machine lottery probability in the inner region of the mouth 1155”. The basic playability of the game may be lost. In general, such a machine lottery probability is desired to be set with a low probability of approximately 1/10 or less.

  Therefore, in view of such a situation, when opening the prize winning opening 1155 in accordance with the small hit (advantageous small hit) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, It is conceivable to allow more than 10 game balls to enter so that only one of these game balls can be received in the V winning opening 1156. However, the small bonus (advantageous small bonus) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery can be set as an opening time during the small bonus game, unlike the big bonus for the purpose of achieving a large amount of prizes. The upper limit value of the game time is 1.8 seconds, and the upper limit value of the number that can be set as the number of game balls detected by the prize winning sensor 1224 during the small hit game is restricted to ten. Has become.

  Here, considering that the firing interval at which the game balls can be continuously fired when the player operates the handle device 500 is 0.6 seconds, the game balls that can be won during the small hit game It can be seen that the number is usually only 3 according to the calculation formula of “1.8 seconds / 0.6 seconds”. Further, even if a large number of game balls can be won during the small hit game, when the number of detected game balls by the bonus game prize sensor 1224 reaches 10, the prize winning port 1155 is closed. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that more than 10 game balls can stably enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 during the small hit game, and eventually to the V winning opening 1156. It can be said that it is difficult to set the machine lottery probability to a probability value of approximately 1/10 or less despite the guidance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
(A) L (for example, 6 centimeters), the length in the left-right direction (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in a specific rolling region) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), When the time of the firing interval when the game ball T is continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds), the prize winning opening is opened and closed A structure such as a structure that is associated with a game ball that rolls in the passage so that the average speed (preferably maximum speed) of the game balls T on the upper surface of the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than “L / 2T”. As long as the player continues to be right-handed, there are at least two (2, three) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) in the closed state. There is a game ball So that it is possible.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(B) When the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the open state, all the game balls that are placed in a waiting state for the prize winning opening 1155 are all the prize winning opening 1155. A structure such as an internal passage in which the time required for the game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the prize winning port sensor 1224 is longer than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area By having (b), the game ball that has entered the internal area is used for the closing determination of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (upper limit determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). All the game balls that are in a waiting state for winning can enter and finish before reaching the detected location (combination winning prize sensor 1224).

  According to such configurations (A) and (B), it is possible to positively generate an overflow prize for the upper limit value of gaming balls that can be won (up to 10 in the small hit game). .

Moreover, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(C) A plurality of game balls on the top surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) are spilled into the prize winning prize opening 1155 almost simultaneously with respect to the advancing direction (left direction) of these gaming balls. The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) provided to slide in the vertical direction (backward direction)
With the configuration (c) described above, each time the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 can be used regardless of the number. Since it is possible to make a batch entry into the inner area of the winning opening 1155, it is possible to reduce the time required for winning the winning combination winning opening 1155 to the limit.

And as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(D) In performing the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 divided into a plurality of short opening times with a predetermined closing interval time, at least two game balls are used as the predetermined closing interval time. The time required to reach the right side of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (a time more than twice the firing interval (for example, 1.2 seconds or more)) is adopted, and the short opening time described above. As the game ball in the waiting state for winning by the sliding movement of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the time required for spilling into the prize winning opening 1155 (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0.12 seconds) is used to perform a short opening operation that is shorter than the firing interval (in calculation, the expected value to win is less than one), Each time a release action appears, all of the at least two or more game balls that are in a waiting state for winning a prize during the elapse of the predetermined closing interval time can be collectively entered into the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. I am doing so.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when in an open state, and with such excellent winning performance, the restriction on the above-mentioned small hit game Even when the game ball is always guided to the V prize opening 1156, the machine lottery probability can be set with a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

  For example, when 0.12 seconds is adopted as the short opening time when the total time allowed for the opening time during the small hit game is 1.8 seconds, the prize winning opening 1155 is divided into 15 times. Short opening is possible. And in this case, in view of the fact that every time the short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are waiting for winning will enter the inner area of the bonus winning slot 1155 in theory. Then, when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened shortly in 15 times, at least 30 game balls will win the prize winning opening 1155.

  However, according to the restriction on the small hit game described above, the tenth game ball is detected by the above-mentioned prize winning port sensor 1224 before all the opening control is digested. The small hit game is ended based on the detection. In this regard, in the above configuration, it is considered that every time a short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are waiting for winning enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 in a lump. For example, it is difficult to consider that only 10 game balls are always won before the small hit game is finished, and it is considered that there are frequent cases where an overflow win occurs and 11 or 12 game balls are won. Therefore, during the small hit game in which such control is performed, on average, more than 10 game balls enter the inner region of the accessory winning award 1155, and thereby the V winning award 1156. Even when one of the game balls is always guided, the machine lottery probability can be set with a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 1190 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 1152, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 1153. 1191 and a general winning opening sensor 1180 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 1151 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 1135, and a big winning opening sensor 1206, respectively. The detection signals from the prize winning sensor 1224 and the specific sensor 1239 are input via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the main control MPU 4100a has a start port solenoid 1215 via the panel relay board 3040. An accessory driving mechanism 3114, an attacker driving mechanism 2121 having an accessory winning solenoid 1225 or an attacker solenoid 1204, a drive signal is output to the V winning solenoid 1232, a main control I / O port 4100b, a panel relay board 3040, and a function display The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, and the normal symbol storage display through the substrate 1114. 1188, game status indicator 1183, round And it outputs a drive signal to 示器 1182.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED display 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860 b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 126, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and indicates the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for display on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is sent via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Via the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle body 504 and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle body 504 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d generates a firing reference pulse based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, and emits a driving current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504. Is input to the firing solenoid 654 when triggered by. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see B 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the gaming board Motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 4 To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882, or the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. In addition, control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the door frame via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. 5 is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. It outputs to LED, such as each decoration board | substrate 2116,2125,2569,3113,3114,3115,3123,3124,3266,3320,3322,3426,3536,3546 with which the game board 4 was equipped. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. 414, the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 and the like provided in the game board 4 and the respective solenoids.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or via the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) having a sense of reality more than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic facilities, LED, and sensors that require electric power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 (FIG. 67) provided in the main body frame 3. Is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4 and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  In addition, the door frame base board 194 is bundled with wires that connect various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, and the like, and extends to the rear. The main frame 3 is connected to the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the ball hitting device 650 is launched into the game area 1100. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the dish unit is provided in the vicinity (FIG. 23).

  The ball path 542b of the foul cover unit 540 passes at a high speed while the game ball (metal) is in contact with the wall surface of the path, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in this portion of the polycarbonate, which can be as high as 10 kV. Yes (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain from the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, unlike metal, the charge accumulated in the resin can only escape from the periphery even when grounded, and most of it remains.

  Then, the electrostatic induction by this electric charge may cause a malfunction of a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified to exceed the appropriate amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. If this happens, for example, a cracking sound such as a squealing noise will be generated from the speaker, or the sound played back by the speaker will become a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound will be generated). It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. The digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but is usually not on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether or not an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the abnormal audio signal described above, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are received. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 126).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the lower part of the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 126 and 127).

[Abnormal audio signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. 127 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the door frame base substrate 194 disposed on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 disposed on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the door frame base substrate 194 is connected to the periphery. The woofer + signal and the woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the + 24V voltage and the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 128, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the + 24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194, are provided. The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  In addition, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been. Thus, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in a place where it is difficult to be affected by electrostatic noise, it is possible to stably suppress an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal. The audio signal is blocked from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 includes an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. When the output abnormality detection signal is received, an abnormal audio signal cut-off circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of an abnormal audio signal to the lower speaker 821 is provided.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

  The woofer + signal that is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is An abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is input.

  In addition, the woofer signal that is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge shape, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, arranged in a subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit). It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF, a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (which includes an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifier bridge circuit. A positive voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by a rectifier bridge circuit is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 while a rectifier bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4. A 0V line 891 is connected to supply 0V, in which the minus portion is cut by the circuit and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  In the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifier bridge circuit (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By applying the voltage to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage, and during the period from the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. In addition to being connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, the base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 having one end connected to a connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the waveform of the + voltage is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, a + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. In addition, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, after the connection point of the positive voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the positive voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal audio signal cut-off circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  A base terminal of a relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to a connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  The fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the A contacts) is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. To the external lower speaker 821.

  Further, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing induced current by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the fifth relay SRL1 is connected. A contact protection varistor SZNR2 is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

  In addition, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. It is like that.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conductive, In FIG. 128, a current flows from the top to the bottom through electrolytic resistor SC1 through resistor SR1, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and in FIG. 128, a current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  In this manner, when a normal sound signal (AC voltage waveform with a different amplitude peak) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 maintains an off state. Accordingly, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept off, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is not practically turned on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Relay SRL1 is in an inoperative state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, the non-operating B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 (the contact is closed), and the non-operating between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. A contact (contact open state). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 becomes conductive, and in FIG. 128, a charging current flows from top to bottom through electrolytic resistor SC1 through resistor SR1, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, an increase in the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 as time passes is applied. As a result, the voltage reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2, and the resistor SR4, and is applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4). , A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and a voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (a voltage appearing at a connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor STR2. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8, and the resistor SR9. Here, when the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, it means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. Note that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the relay SRL1 between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal is the B contact at the time of operation (the contact is open), and between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. A contact (contact closed state). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off for the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  In addition, the third terminal and the fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground. Pulled down, the transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the path of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The coil is switched to a conducting state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

  In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal (photocoupler). Is turned on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is kept off from the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority on preventing speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by an attendant or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input when the audio signal is extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, In FIG. 128, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak. Is done.

  Further, for example, in the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and in FIG. 128, a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage due to the normal audio signal, even if the width of the mountain-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 Through, the charging current rapidly flows into the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal due to the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be described briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated, and the relay SRL1 is disconnected from the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal. The woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 is blocked from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, an unpleasant sound can be prevented from being output to the player.

[LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c that controls display of the above-described effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1115 A character ROM 4150d for storing various data, and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to provide an effect display device 1115 and a second display. Drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1115 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1115. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1115 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is saved in the effect display device 1115 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1115 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the effect display device 1115 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1115. For example, when various people are displayed on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the positions arranged on the screen and the sprites overlap with each other, and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device. 3252 is drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are crossed with the main scan for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in such a direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the effect display device 1115 moves from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, it outputs to the pixels for one line sequentially from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol control process. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol variation pattern setting process. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol changing process. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol small hit game start process. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol small hit game process. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol jackpot game start process. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol jackpot game process.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 129, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process at power-on (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If there is a backup power stored in the RAM, a process to restore the power failure state (power recovery process) is executed. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) Setting, interrupt timing setting, etc.).

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game, such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  This process at the time of power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) In this process, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when a power failure occurs]
Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 and the big winning opening / closing member 1203) for opening / closing the prize winning opening 1155 and the grand prize winning opening 1154 are controlled by changing the opening / closing state of the prize winning opening 1155 and the big winning prize opening 1154. Execute the process.

  In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process related to a normal winning that is an operation trigger of the start door member (movable piece) 1214 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 displays the normal symbol variation display only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state if a specific condition (ON of the short time flag) is satisfied after the big hit gaming state ends. The time required for the control is shortened, and the lottery process is executed so as to allow the winning to the second starting port 1153 by changing the driving mode of the starting port door member 1214 (so-called short-time game). State). In this embodiment, when a normal lottery is performed regardless of whether or not the game is in the short-time game state, the normal winning is always won, but when not in the short-time game state (in the normal game state) Sometimes, as the operating time of the starting port door member 1214, a bridge shorter than the winning threshold time required for the game ball T to roll on the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 and be received by the second starting port 1153. While only the time is selected, when in the short-time gaming state, a bridging time longer than the winning threshold time is necessarily selected as the operation time of the start door member 1214. Accordingly, only when the player is in the short-time gaming state, each time the start door member 1214 operates by driving a game ball into the right area of the center accessory 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hit). Then, it is possible to make a lottery with a high probability that the game ball T enters the second start port 1153 to start the big hit game (big hit, advantageous small hit) (second special) Design lottery).

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination Random numbers for jackpot symbols that are used to determine the stop symbol for special symbols when it is determined that they will be generated. Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination), and a variable display pattern random number (variation time) used to determine a special symbol change display pattern (change time etc.) displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 Random numbers), and the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the big prize opening 1154 in the big hit game (special bonus game) Random number for round determination used for the determination of whether or not the start port door member (movable piece) 1214 that can accept the winning to the second start port 1153 is positioned at the appearance position (a state positioned at the near side) ( There is a random number for determining normal hits used for determination per normal lottery).

  The jackpot symbol random number is also used for the determination regarding the status type of the jackpot (such as whether to operate the time reduction function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot design random number, the round determination random number, and the start door member 1214 related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state are positioned at the appearance position. Update the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol involved. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding whether the big hit gaming state is generated and whether the start door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the start door member (movable piece) 1214 is located at the appearance position) in a predetermined period with each random number is constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being in an unfavorable state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 1152 or the second start opening 1153. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S240) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), a fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), it is determined which of the first special symbol side game and the second special symbol side game is to be processed, and the determined side jackpot The processing flag is updated to “1” after the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery. It should be noted that the processing relating to the game on the side thus determined (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed in the timer interrupt processing every 4 ms until the updated processing flag is returned to “0”. It will be performed continuously each time.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, a special symbol (identification) displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186) determined in the variation start processing (step S130). The variation pattern of the symbol (the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display in either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) is determined. Then, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S160). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160), the changing process (step S170) is executed. In this changing process, the change time set in the change pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and a special symbol display (the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the time-out). The special symbol variation display on the display 1186) is stopped. Thereafter, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the processing selection flag is updated to “3”. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S180). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180), a small hit game start process (step S190) for creating an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the processing flag is updated to “4” in the small hit game start process.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S180 (NO in step S180), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S200). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S200), the small hit game process (step S210) is executed. In the small hit game processing, a small hit game is performed in which a winning combination opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened / closed (sliding) in a control mode according to the type of small hit, and the winning combination winning opening 1155 It is determined whether or not the game balls that have entered the internal area are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. As a result, if it is determined that the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the first small hit game process, the first process flag is set to “5” in order to start the big hit game. Updated. However, if it is not determined that a game ball has been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 within a predetermined time, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S220). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S220), the big hit game start process (step S230) is executed. In the jackpot game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, or the time-shortening function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to “6”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 in step S220 (NO in step S220), it is assumed that the processing flag is 6, and the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the mode of jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum number of wins, etc.) for opening / closing the jackpot 1154 is set, and the jackpot opening / closing member 1203 is set based on the set mode of jackpot game. The opening / closing operation is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S170, step S190, step S210, step S230, and step S240 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110), the process mainly involved in the determination as to whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153, On the condition that it is determined that there has been a ball entry, a process related to updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 1191. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 1191, it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 1153 (YES in step S201). Then, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for second special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired and the second random number provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start port 1153 (a big hit determination random number, for a big hit symbol) as the second start hold storage process (step S203). A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command is set to indicate that a game ball has entered the second start port 1153 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The winning notification command set in this way may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the on-hold display on the second start port 1153 side is displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the like through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the detection signal is 4, next, as a process in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 1190. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from first start port sensor 1190, it is determined that a game ball has been won at first start port 1152 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  In other words, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol for the big hit symbol) as the first start hold storage process (step S207) acquired by the game ball entering the first start port 1152 A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

  In the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has entered the first start port 1152 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set. The winning notification command set in this way may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, it is possible to quickly update the display on the first start port 1152 side on the effect display device 1115 and the like through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 1152, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In this embodiment, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) to the first starting port 1152 is executed after the winning process to the second starting port 1153 (steps S201 to S204) is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process to the first starting port 1152 is executed, the winning process to the second starting port 1153 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is a process that is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery described later and the determination of the variable display pattern) and determines the lottery result in advance. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance determination process, by comparing the random number and the advance determination table, the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (whether or not the big hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) is determined. (The determination made in advance of the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed ( Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the preceding determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the values of the two reserved number counters (first start) corresponding to the special symbol storage indicators 1184 and 1187. It is determined whether or not both the stored number and the second starting stored number are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two on-hold counters corresponding to the special symbol memory indicators 1184 and 1187 are the number of games held on the first special symbol side (lottery) and the number of games held on the second special symbol side (lottery). Numbers are shown respectively. Therefore, if the value of the hold number counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that neither of the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is satisfied, and the interruption The variation start process in the process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301, whether there is a game on the first special symbol side (lottery) or a game on the second special symbol side (lottery) that is on hold Until it is determined that one of the special symbol lottery processes is in a pending state, the progress of the special symbol game is substantially in a standby state. It will be.

  On the other hand, if both the first start memory number and the second start memory number are not “0” (NO in step S301), in order to update the order for executing the big hit lottery on the special symbol side to be processed, Shift processing in the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is performed (steps S302 to S310).

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area, random numbers related to the first special symbol lottery process (for example, the first winning determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first variable random number) are stored. The second special symbol hold storage area stores random numbers related to the lottery process of the second special symbol (for example, the second winning determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number). , The second variable random number) is stored based on the order of their hold.

  The main control MPU 4100a is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area on the processing target side as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reservation storage area) when the special symbol changes. The random number is appropriately manipulated. That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, and the opening / closing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 and the large winning opening / closing member 1203 A start game triggered by a winning of a game ball at the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 can be progressed by being provided for a process for setting the mode, a process for setting the game state, and so on. become.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the lottery process on the second special symbol side is performed, the big hit game is started than when the lottery process on the first special symbol side is performed. The lottery for winning (big hit, advantageous small hit) is performed with a high probability of 10 times or more.

  In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area), the first special symbol lottery is always postponed, so that the player is on the more accurate side. Manipulate the random numbers stored in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area) so that all the lotteries based on the winning at the second start port 1153 (the lottery of the second special symbol) are digested first. Like to do. As a result, the lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 1153, which is regarded as a high-accuracy side for the player until the number of holdings for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0” (second special symbol) Only the symbol lottery) can be performed sequentially. In addition, as will be described later, in the game state in which the so-called time-shortening function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the time required to change the game ball to the second start opening 1153 that is the trigger for the execution of the game, it is only the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side. Execution can improve game entertainment.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested is handled. It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter to be performed (second start storage number) is “0”. As a result, if it is determined that the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially digested is not “0” (NO in step S302), the process of step S303 is as described above. Among the storage areas of the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, a random number group (for example, second winning random number, second symbol random number, second reach random number) stored in the earliest storage area , Second variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process of step S304, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage area of the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the “Out” mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the start winnings in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side is in progress (step S305). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). For the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way, the type of the special symbol on the side to be processed by checking each time the interrupt processing is performed after the variation start processing is completed. (Here, the second special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially digested is “0”. If (YES in step S302), as the processing in step S307, the random number group stored in the earliest storage area (for example, among the storage areas of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a) (for example, , First winning determination random number, first symbol random number, first reach random number, first variable random number) are read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process in step S308, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the “Out” mode.

  More specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side is in progress (step S308). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). For the special symbol variation flag set to “2” in this way, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by checking each time an interrupt processing is performed after the variation start processing is completed. (Here, the first special symbol) can be recognized, and is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  When the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area) is completed in this way, the special symbol lottery (the above-described acquisition) on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag is performed as the process of step S311. A lottery process for winning based on a winning determination random number).

  Here, in the special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), regardless of the game state (normal game state, short-time game state), it is a big hit based on the one hit determination table. A determination process is performed as to whether it is a small hit, reach loss, or loss without reach.

  More specifically, out of the 1,200 types of values that can be acquired as the first winning determination random number in the first special symbol side table among the hit determination tables referred to for comparison with the winning determination random number. Three types of values coincide with the big hit determination value indicating that the big win is won, seven types of values coincide with the small hit determination value that indicates that the big hit is won, and 1190 types of values are the above-mentioned loses 1,200 types of values that can be acquired as the first winning determination random number are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), the probability that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol will be set as 1/400. The probability that a small hit is obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery will be set to approximately 1/171.

  In addition, when the value acquired as the first winning determination random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the acquired value of the first reach random number. .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a type of jackpot,
Of the round games repeated 15 times, the jackpot game is progressed under a special opening control that allows a large amount of prizes to be obtained only in four round games. After the big hit game is executed, the first big hit is a type that always generates a short-time game state, and the release control that makes it possible to win a large amount of prizes in all the round games repeated 15 times. A type that generates a short-time gaming state after the big-hit game is executed only if it is won in a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the time-shortening function is not activated). The second big hit is to be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Of the disadvantageous small hits, which are the types that open the prize winning opening 1155 in a manner that cannot be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, a relatively short time is required for execution of the small hit game The first disadvantage small hit that is the type adopted,
Of the disadvantageous small hits that are the type of opening the prize winning opening 1155 in a manner that cannot be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the winning timing of the game ball when opening the winning prize winning opening 1155 Utilizing the above-described configuration in which variation is less likely to occur, the second disadvantageous small hit, which is a type that opens the accessory winning prize opening 1155 over a plurality of times while being determined in advance to be led to the loss hole 1230c,
Among the advantageous small hits that are the types in which the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when a game ball that has already been launched and is waiting for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156, In the same way as (or close to) the second disadvantageous small hit from the symbol stop to the middle stage after the lapse of a predetermined time, there is a variation in the winning timing of the game ball when opening the prize winning opening 1155 Using the above-described configuration that makes it difficult to guide the lose hole 1230c in advance, it is a type that opens the accessory winning opening 1155 multiple times, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol stop When the player is assigned to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156, the first advantage small hit, which is the type of granting the same privilege as when winning the first big hit, and already fired Of the advantageous small hits that are the types in which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when a game ball that is in the waiting state for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156, the rotating body 1236 Is maintained in the operation state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the short opening operation by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times, and such a short opening operation is performed. Among them, a second advantageous small hit, which is a type of granting the same privilege as that at the time of winning the second big hit when being distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, is prepared.

  In the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big win is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, the first big win (obtained in the big hit game) Although a relatively small number of prizes are allowed, only the 15R hourly junior bonus that is controlled to the short-time gaming state is determined as the type after the big-hit game is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, based on the value of the acquired symbol random number, the first disadvantageous small hit, Either the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is determined.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a small win is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the probability ((7/1200) × ( 20/1000)), there is a possibility that an advantageous small hit is determined as the type. For this reason, even if a small hit game on the first special symbol side is performed, there is still a possibility that a big hit game can occur, so in the small hit game on the first special symbol side Each time the winning opening 1155 is opened, the player can be urged to win the prize winning opening 1155, and the player is expected to shift to the short-time gaming state after the big hit game is performed. Will be able to.

  In particular, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit was not obtained, while the second disadvantage small hit is obtained In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained by the open mode, so that the execution process of the small hit game itself can function as an expected effect. become.

  Further, in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, only the first advantageous small hit can be determined as the advantageous small hit. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit (first big hit) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, an advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained. Regardless of whether the jackpot game is executed or not, a short-time game state is always generated for a predetermined period after the jackpot game is executed (for example, a period until a special symbol lottery is consumed 100 times). To be able to.

  On the other hand, in the table on the second special symbol side, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), among the 1200 kinds of values that can be acquired as the second winning determination random number, three kinds of values are won in the big hit. To match the big hit determination value indicating that the 200 types of values match the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won, and the 997 types of values match the loss determination value indicating that it is the above-mentioned loss. 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the second winning determination random numbers are associated with each other. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (the normal gaming state, the short-time gaming state), the probability that a big hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol will be set as 1/400. The probability of winning a small hit as a result of the special symbol lottery will be set as 1/6.

  In addition, when the value acquired as the second winning determination random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the value of the acquired second reach random number. .

  Also, in the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big win is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, the second big win (obtained in the big hit game) Although there are relatively many prizes that can be made, the game is controlled to the short-time game state after the big hit game is played only if it is won in the normal game state (the game state in which the short-time function is not activated). Only 15R hour junior large hits with certain conditions) are determined as the type.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, only the second advantageous small hit is based on the value of the acquired symbol random number. Is determined as the type. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit (second big hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous small hit (second advantageous small hit) is obtained. Even if the jackpot game is executed based on the game, the normal game state (the game state in which the time-shortening function is not activated) is executed although the jackpot game in which a relatively large number of prizes can be obtained is executed. Only when the winning game is won, the short-time gaming state can be generated for a predetermined period after the jackpot game is played (for example, the period until the special symbol drawing is completed 100 times). ing.

  As described above, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, even if a game ball wins a prize winning prize opening 1155, any of these game balls will enter the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. A disadvantageous small hit game is performed in which the above-mentioned prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened / closed so as not to be distributed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the above-mentioned accessory is played at a timing when a game ball that has already been launched and is waiting for a prize is guided to the V winning opening 1156. An advantageous small hit game in which the winning opening 1155 is opened is performed.

  Therefore, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the V winning slot (specific area) 1156 is played although the small winning game to which a prize acquisition opportunity is given by the opening of the prize winning slot 1155 is performed. Since the game ball is not accepted and no big hit game is generated, it can be said that it can be classified as one type of loss in a broad sense. Therefore, including such unfavorable small hits, a lottery result that has no possibility of generating a big hit game (or a big hit game with a lower probability than the winning probability of the big hit set at a very low probability) The generic name of the lottery results that cannot be generated may be referred to as “losing”.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of the small hit, it is based on the machine lottery related to the distribution of the game balls between the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 and the general area (losing area). Although a small hit game is performed, it is executed as a game in which it is determined that game balls are allocated to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 to generate a big hit game. In a sense, it can be said that there is something that can be classified as one type of big hit. Therefore, a lottery result that will generate a big hit game if the game is progressing properly (for example, 100 game balls are hit right sequentially in one minute) including such an advantageous small hit. (Or a lottery result that will generate a jackpot game with a probability exceeding 1/2 if the game is progressing properly (the probability of generating a jackpot game is higher)) is called “winning” You may do it.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (step S311) is performed in this way, the flag indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the winning information command are respectively processed in step S312. set. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is also determined. Thereafter, when the process flag is updated to “1” so that the process shifts to the variation pattern setting process (step S150) as the process of step S313, the process is terminated.

  Note that the result of the special symbol lottery obtained in this variation start process (including the type of special symbol to be processed) is shown in FIG. 131 as the winning information command set in the process of step S312 above. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17).

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (step S311) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the processing flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 indicates that the big hit is won. Is set (YES in step S401), the variation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S402), and if the flag indicating that the small hit is won is set (step S403) YES), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit according to the type and gaming state is selected (step S404), and if the reach flag is set (YES in step S405), the variation pattern table at the time of reach is selected. (Step S406), either big hit, small hit or reach lose If the flag state indicates that there is no loss, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect) (NO in step S405), the variation pattern table at the time of the loss is selected (step S407). ).

  Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table with the fluctuation random number (first fluctuation random number or second fluctuation random number) on the side acquired in the fluctuation start process (step S130) (step S408). A special symbol display (first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display) on the side to be processed by setting a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 that the determined variation pattern is started. 1186), the special symbol variation display is started (step S409). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S410). As a result, the variation control is performed in the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186) and the effect display device 1115 for the variation time thus determined. After that, when the process flag is updated to “2” so that the process shifts to the changing process (step S170a) as the process of step S411, the process ends.

  The variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S409. . Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command. A display effect is performed.

  By the way, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, when the table is the first special symbol side of the jackpot variation pattern table used in the process of step S402, and is in the normal gaming state. In the normal big hit variation pattern table that is used, a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) for exciting the display effect in the effect display device 1115 are stored in cooperation with the reach loss variation pattern table. That is, in cooperation with the reach-losing fluctuation pattern table, the above-mentioned “winning” expectation levels are made different for each of the fluctuation patterns, and any of these fluctuation patterns is selected in the process of step S408a. Will be determined.

  In the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, when the table is on the first special symbol side in the small hit variation pattern table used in the process of step S404 and is in the normal gaming state. In the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table used for, the first advantageous small hit is obtained regardless of the type of small hit (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantageous small hit) A specific production pattern is expected to appear.

  According to such a configuration, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the display effect with a specific effect pattern is finished regardless of the type. After that, it is possible to prompt the player to make a right hit so that the game ball enters the prize winning hole 1155. However, when a small hit game corresponding to the winning of the first disadvantageous small win is performed, it will be recognized immediately that it is “losing” from the open mode. On the other hand, when a small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second disadvantageous small hit is performed, the execution process of the small hit game itself functions as an expected effect until the middle stage after the predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol stop. Therefore, the expectation of “winning” can be maintained for a long time.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process (step S170) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  When the process flag indicates that the process during change (step S170) should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, first, as the process of step S501, the change pattern setting process (step S150) It is determined whether or not the variation timer set in step S410 has reached 0, that is, whether or not the set variation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the variation timer is not 0, that is, the set variation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501), each time the variation process (step S170) is performed, the step As the processing of S531, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501 that the variation timer has become 0, that is, the set variation time has elapsed, the processing of steps S502 and S503 is performed. As a special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator) on the processing target of the already-determined stop symbol (stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186) is used to perform display control for ending the variable display, and the effect display device 1115 is decorated according to the stop symbol of the special symbol on the side to be processed. A fixed stop command for instructing the derivation display of the symbol display result is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The fixed stop command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, this process is ended when various processes corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery are executed.

  For example, first, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504), the processing is terminated when the processing flag is updated to “5” to start the big hit game (step S506). .

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, this process is terminated when the processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the small hit game (step S513).

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504 and NO in step S511), it is first determined whether or not the time reduction function is in operation (step S521). When the time shortening function is in operation, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested during the operation of the time shortening function has reached a predetermined upper limit value (step S522). That is, when the number of changes of the special symbol digested during the operation of the time-saving function reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the time-saving function is determined to be satisfied. Is stopped (step S523). After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, at the time when the processing flag is updated to “0” assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the fluctuation is suspended as shown to be lost (step S524). ), This process is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S301.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, only lots on the second special symbol side can be continuously executed. With such a high probability, “winning (second advantageous small hit)” can be obtained. Therefore, normally, when the “winning (second advantageous small hit)” is obtained immediately and a big hit game on the second special symbol side is generated, the short game state is terminated at that time, and the special symbol that has been digested is terminated. It can be said that it is an almost impossible event that the short-time gaming state is terminated when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times).

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S190) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in the small hit game start process (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a first counts a timer (a small hit start interval timer) as the process of step S601. ) Is in a set state. As a result, if the small hitting start interval timer has not been set yet, the small hitting start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S602 and S603 in order to start the interval before the start of the small hitting game. Set the hit interval start command.

  Next, as a process of step S604, when the control related to the rotation of the rotating body 1236 provided in the inner region of the accessory winning award 1155 is performed, this process is temporarily ended. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation ends (a stop symbol appears) and is always constant. Control is performed so that movement (a constant rotation mode) appears on the rotating body 1236. Therefore, in the process of step S604, the control structure is such that an execution opportunity is given each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, and the special symbol changes each time the execution opportunity is given. Control is performed to cause the rotator 1236 to make a motion corresponding to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hitting start interval timer) since the end of (stop symbol appears).

  Note that the small hit interval start command set in the process of step S603 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the interval before the start of the small hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  After the small hitting start interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the small hitting start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601. In the processing of step S611, it is determined whether or not the small hitting start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has elapsed. In the process of step S611, as long as it is determined that the small hitting start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has not elapsed (NO in step S611). Each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621.

  However, even though the small hitting start interval timer is decremented by 1 by the process of step S621, the execution opportunity of the process of step S604 is given each time, thereby ending the variation of the special symbol. A motion corresponding to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hitting start interval timer) since the appearance of the stop symbol appears on the rotating body 1236 each time. As will be described later, such a movement (drive control) of the rotating body 1236 is performed specially by continuously being executed in the small hit game process after the small hit game start process is completed. A constant movement (a constant rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236 after the change of the symbol ends (a stop symbol appears).

  As a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S611 that the small hitting start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the small hitting game has elapsed. Then, in order to execute the small hit game, the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S612), and when the rotating body 1236 is controlled (step S604), this processing is ended.

  For the small hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number). For example, when a small bonus hit is obtained, a relatively short time is set (relatively shortening the expected time length), whereas an advantageous bonus hit is obtained. If a tendency to set a relatively long time (relatively lengthening the expected value of the time length) is given, the expected degree that the advantageous small hit is obtained by the length of the small hit interval Will be able to show.

  In addition, when a small hit is obtained in the short-time gaming state, the short-time function is maintained even in such a small hit interval, and it is easy to enter the second starting port 1153. If the length of the interval before the small hit game is changed according to the type (the type determined by the random number), the ease of maintaining the hold of the second special symbol can be changed according to the type of the small hit symbol It is also possible to do.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game ball is received at the second start port 1153 at least as an interval period before the start of the small hit game on the second special symbol side in the short-time game state. Therefore, a sufficiently long long interval time is always adopted, and the number of second special symbol lottery reservations can be secured up to the upper limit value within this long interval time. In other words, in this case, the second advantageous small hit game is performed while the number of second special symbol lottery reserves is secured up to the upper limit (4), and as a result, a big hit game is generated, and the short-time game state is ended. Since the second special symbol lottery for the four times secured up to the upper limit of the holding is sequentially digested in the normal gaming state, it is said that the “winning ( It is possible to provide an on-hold chance game such as whether or not “second advantageous small hit, big hit” can be obtained.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to realize such an on-hold chance game, in the interval period before the start of the small hit game, the second start port 1153 is used instead of the accessory winning port 1155. The control is performed so that an effect image that prompts the player to enter a game ball appears. According to such a configuration, prior to starting the jackpot game, the number of the second special symbol lottery can be secured up to the upper limit value, and the second start opening 1153 and the bonus winning opening can be opened and closed. From the positional relationship with the member 1221, it is possible to secure a game ball that is in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the small hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a is first in a state where the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress as the process of step S701. It is determined whether or not a small hit game execution flag indicating ON is in an ON state. As a result, if the small hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, in order to start control related to the execution of the small hit game, the processing of step S702 is performed as the type of the small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous An open pattern corresponding to the small hit, first disadvantage small hit, and second disadvantage small hit) and an open timer for measuring the time required for execution of control related to the open pattern are set. Next, as the processing of step S703 and step S704, the small hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress is turned on, and a small hit start command is set. To do. And as a process of step S705, when the drive control of the said rotary body 1236 is performed, this process is once complete | finished.

  As described above, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 (step S705) is executed in such a manner that the control content (step S604) in the small hit game start process is carried over as it is, and the special symbol changes. Control for operating the rotating body 1236 is performed based on the elapsed time from the end (the stop symbol appears). As a result, a constant movement (a constant rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236 after the special symbol variation ends (a stop symbol appears).

  After the small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined in the process of step S701 that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. In the process of step S711, it is determined whether or not the accessory closing flag indicating that the closing condition of the accessory winning prize opening 1155 is satisfied is on, and the accessory closing flag is If it is not in the ON state, it will be determined whether or not the closing condition for the prize winning opening 1155 is established in the processes of steps S712 and S713.

  Here, in the process of step S712, a determination is made as to whether or not the release timer is 0, that is, whether the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game has reached a predetermined upper limit time. In the process of step S713, whether or not the total number of game balls won in the above-mentioned prize winning slot 1155 during the small hit game period has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10). Judgment is made.

  As a result of these processes, if it is determined that the release timer is not yet 0 and the total number of winning prizes has not reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 10), first, the process of step S714 is performed. Then, the control corresponding to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, unless the condition for closing the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (sliding operation) related to the opening / closing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 through the process of step S714. ) Is updated (managed), and as a result, the above-mentioned roles are provided with an open pattern according to the type of small hits (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, first disadvantageous small hit, second disadvantageous small hit). A small hit game in which the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 opens and closes is realized. The details of the opening pattern corresponding to the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit) will be described later.

  After the control according to the release pattern is executed, whether or not the specific sensor 1239 for detecting that the game ball has been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 is turned on as the process of step S715. Judging. As a result, if it is determined that a game ball has been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (the specific sensor 1239 is in an on state), as a process of step S716, the V winning opening ( The V history flag indicating that the specific area 1156 has been received is turned on. Next, as the process of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this process is temporarily ended.

  If it is determined in step S715 that the specific sensor 1239 is not in the on state, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed in step S705 without operating the V history flag. This processing is once ended at the time of performing.

  Such a process (steps S714 to S716, S705) is performed each time the interrupt process is performed unless the closing condition (steps S712, S713) of the prize winning prize opening 1155 is satisfied, thereby opening / closing the prize winning award opening. It is possible to provide a game aiming at an opportunity for the specific sensor 1239 to be turned on while updating (managing) the movement for opening / closing the member 1221 and the movement for rotating the rotating body 1236 each time.

  As a result of repeating these processes (steps S714 to S716, S705), in the process of step S712, the release timer is 0, that is, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game is determined in advance. It is determined that the upper limit time has been reached, or in the process of step S713, the total number of game balls won in the prize winning slot 1155 during the small hit game period is a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10), it is determined that the closing condition for the winning award winning opening 1155 is satisfied, and each process (steps S721 to S723) for closing the winning award winning opening 1155 is performed. Become.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first performs control for closing the prize winning opening 1155 by closing the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 as the process of step S721. Next, as a process of step S722 and step S723, an interval timer is set after closing to count the time since the prize winning opening 1155 is closed, and the closing condition of the prize winning opening 1155 is established. The indicated accessory closing flag is turned on. As a result, a new game ball does not enter the internal area of the bonus winning award 1155 within the small hit game process.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when there is a game ball heading to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while the small hit game is being performed, Until the closing condition is satisfied, the game ball is held at a position where it cannot be received by the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, and the holding is released after the closing condition of the bonus winning opening 1155 is satisfied. By doing so, it has a control (steps S604 and 705) and a structure (see FIG. 120) that allow a game ball to be received in the V prize opening (specific area) 1156.

  Therefore, the interval timer after closing is set with a time longer than the time required for the held game ball to be received by the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (step S722), and step S731. In this process, until it is determined that the time is up, every time the interrupt process is performed, the control relating to the execution of the small hit game is already in progress (YES in step S701). While it is determined that the closing condition of the goods winning opening 1155 is established (YES in step S711), the process of subtracting the timer value of the interval timer after closing (step S732), and the V winning opening ( (Special area) V history flag is on on condition that game ball has been accepted to 1156 Process that is operated (step S715, S716), and processing according to the drive control of the rotating member 1236 is be sequentially performed respectively (step S705).

  However, in this case, in the process of step S705, the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to appear a certain amount of time based on the elapsed time since the change of the special symbol ends (the stop symbol appears) is ended. As a control after the closing condition of the accessory prize winning opening 1155 is established, the rotating body 1236 is moved to the state shown in FIG. 120B (the game ball held is the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. The control to shift to the supplied state) is performed.

  As a result of the repeated processing (steps S732, S715, S716, and S705), when the interval timer after closing expires (YES in step S731), each process for ending the small hit game (step S741) To Steps S746 and S751).

  That is, main control MPU 4100a, first, if the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S741), the upper limit of the number of changes in the special symbol digested while the time reduction function is in operation is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the value has been reached (step S742). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the number of changes in the special symbol digested while the time-saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the time-saving gaming state is terminated. The time-shortening function is stopped when the conditions to be fulfilled are met, and if the final fluctuation is a pattern fluctuation corresponding to the small hit, the time-shortening function is stopped at the timing when the small hit game is finished. (Step S743). As a result, even after the small hit symbol stops, the time-shortening function continues until the small hit game finishes, so the special symbol hold state when in the short-time gaming state is suitable. This can be maintained, which will be described later.

  After that, when it is determined that the V history flag is in an ON state (YES in step S744), it is assumed that a game ball has been received at the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hit game processing. In order to start the big hit game, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S745), and various flags operated in the small hit game processing (small hit game execution flag, accessory closing flag, V history flag, etc.) ) Is turned off (step S746), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the V history flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S744), it is assumed that no game ball has been accepted into the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hit game processing. The processing flag is updated to “0” (step S751), and various flags (such as the small hit game execution flag, the accessory closing flag, and the V history flag) operated in the small hit game processing are operated in an off state. At this point (step S746), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S301.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (step S230) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in the jackpot game start process (step S230), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (a jackpot start interval timer) that measures the pre-start interval of the jackpot game as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is already completed. As a result, if the jackpot start interval timer has not been set yet, the condition device is activated as the process of step S802, and the time reduction function is activated as the processes of step S803 and step S804. (YES in step S803), the operation is stopped. That is, after these preparations are made, in order to start the interval before the start of the jackpot game, as the processing of steps S805 and S806, the jackpot start interval timer is set and this processing is performed when the jackpot interval start command is set. It will end once.

  Note that the big hit interval start command set in the process of step S806 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the big hit start interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the big hit start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S801, and the next step S811 In this process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. In the process of step S811, as long as it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S811), Every time the big hit game start process (step S230) is performed, the big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821.

  Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S811, when it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the interval before starting the jackpot game has elapsed, When the processing flag is updated to “6” in order to execute the big hit game (step S812), this processing is terminated.

  For the big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number).

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 140, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the big hit game execution flag is on. And as a result, when the big hit game execution flag is not in the on state, in order to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the second attacker device 2150, as the processing of step S902, the release mode corresponding to the type of the big hit Set (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round).

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the fact that only the 15R hourly big hit is prepared as the type of big hit, in the case where the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game However, since the big hit game in which the round game is played 15 times is generated, in the process of step S902, “15 times” is always set as the number of rounds. However, regarding the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round, the case of the first special symbol side (a jackpot game according to the winning of the first big hit) and the case of the second special symbol side (the second big hit amount) It is set in a different manner from the jackpot game according to the winning), so that the jackpot game on the second special symbol side (the jackpot game according to the winning of the second jackpot) can be awarded more prizes. I have to.

  More specifically, when a big win game according to the lottery result on the first special symbol side (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) is performed, there is an award that can earn approximately 400 game balls. While the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings for each round are determined according to the mode given, a big hit game is performed according to the lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) on the second special symbol side In such a case, the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined in such a manner that a prize that can acquire approximately 2000 game balls is given.

  After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, as a process of step S903 and step S904, the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is turned on. At the same time, when the jackpot start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress in the process of step S901. Thus, it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been digested in the next step S911. As long as it is determined in the process of step S911 that the set number of rounds has not yet been digested, that is, it is determined that the control is in the middle of the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S911). Whenever the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, the control according to the set release pattern is executed as the process of step S912. As a result, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening / closing of the special prize opening / closing member 1203 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912. As a result, a big hit game in which the big winning opening / closing member 1203 is opened / closed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit is realized.

  When such control is being performed, it is determined in the process of step S911 that the set number of rounds has been consumed, that is, it has been determined that all the control for executing the jackpot game has been completed. (YES in step S911), each process (step S921, step S922, step S931, step S941, step S942) for generating a big hit game end interval is performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a timer (a big hit end interval timer) for counting the big hit game end interval has been set (step S921). As a result, if the big hit end interval timer is not set yet, the big hit end interval timer is set as the processing of steps S941 and S942 to start the big hit game end interval, and a big hit interval end command is issued. At the time of setting, this process is temporarily terminated.

  Note that the big hit interval end command set in the process of step S942 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, a display effect during the big hit game end interval appears through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the big hit end interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the big hit end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S921, and the next step S922 is executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. In the process of step S922, as long as it is determined that the jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S922), Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, the big hit end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S931.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S922 that the jackpot end interval timer has reached 0, that is, it has been determined that the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed. Each process (step S923-step S928) for ending the big hit game will be performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first operates, in the process of step S923, the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress. Next, if the result of the special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for operating the time-saving function (YES in step S924), the transition to the time-saving gaming state is controlled by operating the time-saving function (step S925). ).

  Then, after the processing related to the speed reduction function is performed in this manner, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S926), and when the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S927), this processing is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S301.

  According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step S911 that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the corresponding big prize opening 1154 is opened according to the type of jackpot ( In step S912), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a prize according to the type of jackpot can be obtained by the player.

[About small hit games]
FIG. 142 shows an open state of an accessory winning opening 1155 when a small hit game (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit) is performed, and a prize winning It is a time chart which shows the example about the relationship with the operation state of the rotary body (sorting apparatus) 1236 in the inner area | region of the opening | mouth 1155. FIG. The control shown in FIG. 142 is executed by the main control MPU 4100a, for example, every 4 ms by the small hit game process (see FIG. 138).

  As described above, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 according to this embodiment includes the receiving position in which the receiving portion 1236a faces upward (FIG. 124 (a)) and the discharge position in which the receiving portion 1236a faces rightward. (Fig. 124 (b)) is rotatable. In the state where the rotating body 1236 is in the storage position, only the first supplied game ball is received by the receiving unit 1236a among the game balls received in the prize winning opening 1155, and other game balls are stored. Is supplied to the lost hole 1230c. When the rotating body 1236 rotates to the release position, the held game ball is discharged from the rotating body 1236 and supplied to the V prize opening 1156. On the other hand, the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 according to this embodiment receives any of the game balls received in the prize winning opening 1155 when the receiving portion 1236a is in the release position facing right. It also has a function of supplying the lost hole 1230c so that a game ball is not received in the V winning opening 1156 without being held by the portion 1236a.

  In this regard, in the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), from the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of small hit appears regardless of the type of small hit. It rotates so that a certain operation appears. Such an operation is realized by performing the processing in step S604 and the processing in step S705 each time an interrupt processing is performed.

  Further, as described above, in the special flow passage according to this embodiment, as long as the player continues to be right-handed, there is at least two on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. The above-described (2, 3) game balls are formed in a structure that allows them to exist in a state of waiting for winning in the prize winning opening 1155.

[About the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained]
As shown in FIG. 142 (d), the second advantageous small hit (lottery on the second special symbol side) is realized while the structure of the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 and the special flow-down passage is realized. In the small hit game when the player is obtained, first, until a plurality of game balls are placed in the awaiting award state on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) that is closed by the player's right-handed At a timing slightly later (0.02 seconds) than the timing t2 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position, after the timing required for Control is performed to slide the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state.

  However, in this case, the timing t2 is set to arrive in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the prize winning opening 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the storage position (a state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning combination prize opening 1155 is in a waiting state for winning. Although a plurality of game balls can be received immediately in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, the game balls are not in the storage position and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a, but to the loss hole 1230c. Will be sorted and discharged.

  The reason why such a high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by a motor but by driving a V prize solenoid 1232, and a prize for winning a prize is obtained. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of game balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state Regardless of the fact, it is described above that each time the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened, it is formed with a structure that can quickly and collectively enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. That's right. In this regard, at timing t2, after timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of the small hit appears, waiting for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). After that, a sliding operation (opening) is performed for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds) required for a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to enter the prize winning opening 1155 at a time. Control) is performed.

  According to such control at the timing t2, all of the game balls are lost in spite of the fact that a plurality of game balls that are in a prize waiting state enter the prize winning opening 1155 in an extremely short opening time. Since the game balls are distributed to 1230c and discharged, the game balls received in the bonus prize winning opening 1155 are not consumed wastefully in the small winning game opening time (maximum 1.8 seconds). The probability of being accepted by 1156 (the probability of machine drawing) can be suitably reduced.

  In addition, according to such control, basically, only the game balls that are already in the awaiting state of winning a prize on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) are included. It is possible to win a prize only when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened. That is, in this case, since the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the bonus winning prize opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately, the probability of being accepted by the V winning prize opening 1156 (the probability of mechanical drawing) It becomes possible to control this appropriately.

  Then, after the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed, the timing (t3) when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position is awaited. Then, the control is performed to slide the accessory prize winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state again for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

  Here, as apparent from FIGS. 142 (d) and 142 (e), when the timing t3 arrives, at least the upper surface of the accessory prize opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is present. Since two or more (2, 3) game balls exist in a waiting state for winning a prize, these game balls are immediately put into the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding action of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. Will be accepted. In addition, at timing t3, since the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the discharge position to the accommodation position, any one of the game balls received in a lump in the prize winning opening 1155 is It will be held by the receiving part 1236a without fail. The game ball held in this way is released from the rotating body 1236 when the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the discharging position at a timing t4. 1156 will be accepted.

  However, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), a plurality of bonus winning opening / closing members 1221 are provided within the period from timing t1 to t4. Control for maintaining the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) for the time required to supply the game balls (three or more in this case), and the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 Control that slides for only a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state is alternately performed five times.

  That is, in this case, every time the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state within the period of timing t1 to t4, 2, 3 Individual game balls will be received in the prize winning opening 1155. In view of such an acceptance situation, normally, when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the small hit game (when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) The upper limit value of game balls that can be won in the small hit game) is reached (maximum of 10) (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  In this regard, when the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won at the time when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the opening / closing control of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is performed. In addition to being terminated (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to perform a certain operation based on the elapsed time (elapsed time from the timing t1) after the stop symbol appears is terminated. Instead, control is performed to displace the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position. Thus, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game (the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) are ended before the timing t4 arrives. The big hit game according to the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 can be executed.

  Further, in a state where the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 in the storage position holds the game ball by the receiving portion 1236a, the held game ball can be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. Among the determined game balls, all of the game balls received in the prize winning award 1155 are distributed to the lost holes 1230c and discharged. According to such a configuration, for example, in the period of timing t3 to t4, while a game ball is surely supplied to the V winning opening 1156 in the future, a game that has entered the accessory winning opening 1155 The probability that the ball is distributed to the V winning opening 1156 (the probability of mechanical drawing) can be suitably reduced.

  However, even in the small hit game when such second advantageous small hit is obtained, if the player does not continue to make a right-hand hit, the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won (maximum The timing t4 arrives without reaching (10) and the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) reaches a predetermined upper limit time. (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

  That is, in this case, in addition to the completion of the opening / closing control of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 when the upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: Step S721), the elapsed time after the stop symbol appears (timing t1) The control for causing the rotating body 1236 to make a certain action appear based on the elapsed time from the first position), and instead, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the discharge position. Control will be performed. As a result, if there is a game ball that can be received at the V winning opening 1156, the big hit game can be executed, whereas if there is no game ball that can be received at the V winning opening 1156, the big win game is not executed. The next change of the special symbol will be performed.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to make a right strike, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time The jackpot game that is advantageous to the player by always supplying one of many game balls to the V winning opening 1156 while suitably reducing the probability of being accepted by the V winning opening 1156 (probability of machine drawing). Can be started (corresponds to "winning").

  Also, a short opening in which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) less than or equal to the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500. While performing an operation (a short opening operation in which the expected value to be won is less than one in calculation), each time the short opening operation appears, a plurality of game balls are moved to the inner area of the bonus winning award 1155. It is possible to enter. Accordingly, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the prize winning opening 1155 is in an open state, and this excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in gaming interest. Can be done.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the bonus winning opening / closing member 1221 ( The short opening operation by the door part 1221a) is performed a plurality of times, so that the total opening time of the prize winning opening 1155 (0.6 seconds) is short but many (10 or more) game balls are located in the inner area. It is made possible to enter. However, in order to set the machine lottery probability with a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), the game ball is waiting for winning with the aim of the timing t2 guided to the lost hole 1230. In order to cancel the state, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is short-opened from the closed state to the open state, or the rotating body 1236 is in the operating state (accommodated) shown in FIG. The position is maintained (at timings t3 to t4), and the short opening operation by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened, a large number (10 or more) of game balls can enter the internal area, but the V winning opening 1156 is reached. The game balls to be guided are limited to the game balls first supplied to the rotating body 1236 while the rotating body 1236 is maintained in the operation state (accommodating position) shown in FIG. It becomes like this. In other words, in this case, even if the game ball launch by the player is delayed, at least one game ball enters the inner area of the accessory prize winning opening 1155 at the timing t3 to t4. For example, it is possible to finally accept the V prize opening 1156. On the other hand, all other game balls different from the game balls initially supplied to the rotator 1236 are guided to the lose hole 1230. While the game ball is guided to the V prize opening 1156 during the short opening operation), the machine lottery probability is maintained at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less. Will be able to.

[About the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the small hit game when the first unfavorable small hit (the first special symbol side lottery) is obtained is also first closed by right-handed by the player. Rotating body (distribution device) 1236 after the timing at which it takes time for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the state. At a timing slightly earlier (0.02 seconds) than the timing t2 at which the player moves from the storage position to the release position, control is performed so that the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid from the closed state to the open state.

  Similarly, in this slide operation, the timing t2 arrives in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the prize winning hole 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. It is said that. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the storage position (a state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning combination prize opening 1155 is in a waiting state for winning. Although a plurality of game balls can be received immediately in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, the game balls are not in the storage position and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a, but to the loss hole 1230c. Will be sorted and discharged.

  However, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, as the time of the slide operation, a time during which a new game ball can be supplied during the slide operation (a time slightly longer than the firing interval ( 0.62 seconds)), in addition to a plurality of game balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. A newly supplied game ball can also be awarded to the prize winning opening 1155.

  In addition, in the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, after such a 0.62 second slide operation is completed, the slide operation is not performed again and the small hit game ( The elapsed time from the start of the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is started reaches a predetermined upper limit time (the above-mentioned release timer is up) (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

  In this way, in the small hit game when the first disadvantageous small hit is obtained, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in the prize winning slot 1155, but any of these game balls is the above V winning slot. 1156 is not accepted. Therefore, the big hit game cannot be executed due to the small hit game (corresponding to “losing”).

[About each small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit and the first advantageous small hit are obtained]
In the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantage small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by the open mode, and the execution process of the small hit game itself can function as an expected effect. It has become.

  That is, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit (the first special symbol side lottery) or the first advantageous small hit (the first special symbol side lottery) is obtained, FIG. 142 (b), ( As shown in c), the operation related to the opening / closing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is performed in the same or similar manner until the timing t8 described later from the timing t1.

  As in the case of other small hit games, the first operation is first performed until a plurality of game balls are supplied to the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) that is closed by the player's right-hand strike. At a timing slightly later (0.02 seconds) than the timing t2 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position, after the timing required for Control is performed to slide the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds).

  Also here, similarly, the timing at which this sliding operation is performed is a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received by the prize winning opening 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236 by the sliding operation. The timing t2 is set to arrive. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the storage position (a state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning combination prize opening 1155 is in a waiting state for winning. Although a plurality of game balls can be received immediately in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, the game balls are not in the storage position and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a, but to the loss hole 1230c. Will be sorted and discharged.

  The reason why such a high-speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by a motor but by driving a V prize solenoid 1232, and a prize for winning a prize is obtained. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

  However, in each small hit game when the second unfavorable small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the timing t3 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position arrives. And after the timing t4 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates so as to return from the storage position to the discharge position, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened from the closed state. There is no sliding motion. Therefore, an opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and an opportunity to be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to the operation after timing t4 is performed.

  That is, first, at a timing t4 when a relatively long closing interval (11.4 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in a waiting state for winning a prize are displayed in a prize winning opening with an extremely short release time (0.12 seconds). 1155 can be entered all at once, but when these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the release position. All of these game balls are distributed to the lost holes 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at the timing t5 when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the timing t4, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and from the timing 5 to 2.5 seconds. At the elapsed timing t6, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated again from the storage position to the discharge position.

  However, in each small hit game when the second unfavorable small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even during the period of timing t5 to t6. There is no sliding motion. Therefore, an opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and an opportunity to be distributed to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to the operation after timing t6 is performed.

  That is, first, even at a timing t6 when a relatively long closing interval (8.88 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in a waiting state for winning a prize are displayed with a very short opening time (0.12 seconds). 1155 can be entered all at once, but when these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the release position. All of these game balls are distributed to the lost holes 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at the timing t7 when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the timing t6, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position, and 2.5 seconds from the timing t7. At the elapsed timing t8, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated again from the storage position to the discharge position.

  However, in each small hit game when the second unfavorable small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even during the period of timing t7 to t8. There is no sliding motion. Therefore, an opportunity for the game ball to be held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 (and an opportunity to be distributed to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to the operation after timing t8 is performed.

  In this way, in each small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, a plurality of game balls from the stop symbol appears at timing t1 until the timing t8 arrives. Control for maintaining the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) for a time sufficient for the player to enter the prize waiting state, and the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 for an extremely short time (0. 12 seconds) is repeatedly performed over a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, each time a very short slide operation (opening operation) is performed, it is possible to allow a plurality of game balls that are in a waiting state to enter a prize winning opening 1155. Any of these sliding operations (opening operations) is performed with respect to the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 that performs a certain movement after the stop symbol appears at the timing t1. The timing at which the receiving portion 1236a is not in the receiving position (more precisely, when the game ball that has entered the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is in the receiving position. (Not timing).

  That is, in the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the timing from the stop symbol appears at the timing t1 until the timing t8 arrives. In the meantime, all the game balls that have entered the prize winning hole 1155 are all distributed to the lost holes 1230c so that the return is not determined. (Approximate). As a result, the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as an expected effect that can make the user aware of the possibility of an advantageous small hit (timing t1 to t8).

  Further, in such a relatively long period of timings t1 to t8, the effect display device 1115 may perform an expected effect that makes it possible to recognize the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained.

  That is, as described above, during the period from the timing t1 to the time t8, although a game for providing a lot of game balls to the prize winning opening 1155 is provided, the closing interval having a relatively long time is provided. Thus, the time for which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened is a relatively short time (more precisely, a short period (0.12 seconds) in which a game ball already fired can win). To be controlled. Therefore, if a predetermined effect (expected effect that can make the user aware of the possibility of winning an advantageous bonus) is performed during such a period of timings t1 to t8, an accessory winning award 1155 is obtained. Since it becomes easy to concentrate on the production during the closed state for a relatively long time (closing interval), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, during the period from timing t1 to t8, a closing interval having a relatively long time and a game ball that is in a relatively short time waiting for an upper entry award enter the internal area of the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155. And the short opening period that can be entered repeatedly appear, so there is a low sense of tension when in the closing interval (expectation that can make you aware of the possibility of having an advantageous small hit) (Effects) basically appear, it is possible to periodically generate a game effect with a high degree of tension as to whether or not a game ball is accepted into the V prize opening (specific area) 1156. Therefore, this also makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 142 (b) and (c), when the timing t8 arrives, the small hit game and the first advantageous small hit when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained. Only when the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained among the small hit games at the time, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is only for a very short time (0.12 seconds). Recognizing whether the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained or the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained is performed from the slide operation (opening operation) Become possible.

  In addition, the sliding operation (opening operation) at the timing t8 is similar to the previous case, and a plurality of game balls that are waiting for winning are placed in the prize winning opening 1155 in an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to enter the ball in a lump, when these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the discharge position. Are all discharged to the lost hole 1230c.

  In the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained, when the slide operation (opening operation) is performed for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) at timing t8, a winning can be made. When the upper limit of the game balls to be reached (maximum of 10 in the small hit game) is reached or the above-mentioned release timer expires at a predetermined timing thereafter (FIG. 138: YES in step S712), the V prize The game ends without the game ball being received in the mouth 1156. Therefore, the big hit game cannot be executed due to the small hit game when the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained (corresponding to “losing”).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the above-mentioned amount of time is sufficient for a plurality of game balls to be placed in the winning award state. While the bonus prize opening / closing member 1221 is maintained in the closed state (closed interval), it waits for the timing t9 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. Thus, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for a very short time (0.12 seconds).

  That is, in this case, if the right strike is continued, at least two or more (2, 3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. The slide operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed. As a result, regardless of the number of game balls that are waiting for winning, the game balls are immediately accepted into the prize winning port 1155, and one of these game balls is It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 at the accommodation position.

  Then, at time t10, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) reaches a predetermined upper limit time (FIG. 138: Step In step S712, YES, control is performed to displace the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position. As a result, a big hit game according to the fact that the game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156 can be executed.

  However, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), within the period of timing t1 to t9, there are a plurality of bonus winning opening / closing members 1221. Control for maintaining the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state (closing interval) for the time required to supply the game balls (three or more in this case), and the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 Control for sliding operation from the closed state to the open state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed four times.

  That is, in this case, every time the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state within the period of timing t1 to t9, 2, 3 Individual game balls will be received in the prize winning opening 1155. Then, in view of such an acceptance situation, when the sliding motion (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed, a prize is won in the small hit game (small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained). There is also a possibility that the upper limit (10 at the maximum) of the possible game balls will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  In this regard, when the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won is reached at the time when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9, the opening / closing control of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is ended. In addition to this (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing the rotating body 1236 to make a certain action appear based on the elapsed time (elapsed time from the timing t1) after the stop symbol appears. In place of this, control for displacing the rotating body (distribution device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game are ended before the timing t10 arrives, and as a result, the big hit corresponding to the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 The game can be executed.

  However, in the small hit game when the advantageous small hit is obtained, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (as a result, in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) Before the time at which the opportunity to be distributed) is given, the upper limit value (maximum of 10) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is reached, and the V winning opening (specific area) It is required that the small hit game is not ended without being assigned to 1156.

  For example, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening 1155 is opened for a short period of time only three times while a maximum of three game balls can be in a waiting state for winning. Thereafter, at timing t9, control is performed so that the prize winning opening 1155 is opened for a short time so that the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distributing device) 1236. In other words, in this case, until the timing t9 arrives, only 9 game balls smaller than the upper limit value (10 at the maximum) can be won in the accessory prize winning opening 1155. The small hit game will not end without being assigned to (region) 1156.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit the right, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time The jackpot game that is advantageous to the player by always supplying one of many game balls to the V winning opening 1156 while suitably reducing the probability of being accepted by the V winning opening 1156 (probability of machine drawing). Can be started (corresponds to "winning").

  In both the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the ball hitting device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is used. A short opening operation in which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) less than a game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) (in calculation, the expected value to win is less than 1) Each time a short opening action appears, a plurality of game balls that have already been fired and are in a waiting state for winning are transferred to the internal area of the bonus winning award 1155. It is possible to enter. Accordingly, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the prize winning opening 1155 is in an open state, and this excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in gaming interest. Can be done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “basically, there is already a waiting state for a prize on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a). By adopting a configuration in which only a game ball can win a prize only when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened, the timing when the game ball enters the inner area of the prize winning slot 1155 can be controlled more accurately. As described above, this is possible. In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned small hit games, by using such accurate control performance, the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball in a waiting state for winning is guided to the V winning opening 1156. It is possible to selectively use the control to make the open state and the control to make the above-mentioned prize winning opening 1155 open at the timing when the game ball in the awaiting prize state is guided to the loss hole 1230c. We are trying to realize the playability that small hit games should bear.

  Further, as described above, according to each small hit game according to this embodiment (the small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)), the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) Each time the role winning opening 1155 is opened in a structure where the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface is managed so as not to exceed “L / 2T”, the prize winning a prize is made in advance. This is maintained as a closed state (closed interval) only for a time (at least 1.2 seconds or more) required for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the mouth opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). As a result, as long as the player continues to make a right turn, at least two (2, 3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. Will be able to exist as.

  In addition, since it becomes possible to play a game so that at least two or more game balls T are regularly present in a specific rolling area (the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a)), Each time the winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is opened, an excellent winning performance such that a plurality of game balls can win a prize is realized, thereby giving a sense of speed to the winning situation at the prize winning opening 1155. Will be able to.

  In addition, as described above, according to each small hit game according to this embodiment (the small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)), all the game balls that are in the winning awaiting state are in the role. The position at which the game ball that has entered the internal area is detected by the bonus game prize sensor 1224 (with respect to the number of game balls that can be awarded), rather than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. Each time a bonus winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened in an internal passage in which the time required to reach the detection point used for determining the upper limit value is longer, a plurality of game balls are Since it has become possible to win, it is possible to actively generate overflow winnings for the upper limit of gaming balls that can be won, and dynamic winning performance and winning performance exceeding the set value It becomes possible to present.

  By actively generating such overflow winnings, a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit (10 at the maximum) of game balls that can be won in the small hit game are awarded to the prize winning opening 1155 When the game ball is surely guided to the V winning opening 1156 in the above-mentioned regulations for each small hit game due to such excellent winning performance. Even so, the machine lottery probability can be set lower than approximately 1/10.

  Moreover, as described above, according to each small hit game according to this embodiment (the small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)), the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) A direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the advancing direction (left direction) of the game balls so that a plurality of game balls waiting for winning on the upper surface spill into the prize winning opening 1155 almost simultaneously. In this way, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened while the structure is such that it can accept all of the game balls waiting for winning in a very short time. Each time it is done, the opening time is significantly shorter (less than half 0.12 seconds) than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) by the ball hitting device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 To do There.

  According to such a configuration, in the calculation, while performing the short opening operation in which the expected value to be won is less than one, each time the short opening operation appears, the predetermined closing interval time elapses. Since at least two or more game balls T that are waiting for winning can enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 almost at the same time, The number of winning game balls T can be dramatically increased, and in the small hit game where the upper limit time is set, the opening time (up to 1.8 seconds) can be consumed without waste. You will be able to win game balls

  Furthermore, according to each small hit game according to this embodiment (the small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)), such a short opening operation is performed by the rotating body (distributing device) 1236. The timing at which the receiving portion 1236a is not in the receiving position (more precisely, when the game ball that has entered the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is in the receiving position. It is supposed to appear with no aim). Alternatively, when a short opening operation is performed when the receiving unit 1236a of the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 is in the storage position, the above-described release timer expires or the upper limit value of game balls that can be won As long as any of the conditions for reaching the maximum (10 in the small hit game) is not satisfied, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 is not displaced to the discharge position. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably reduce the probability (game probability) that the game ball received in the winning item winning opening 1155 is received in the V winning opening 1156.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, not the motor but the V winning solenoid 1232 is driven so that the rotating body 1236 rotates at high speed. The rotator 1236 can be displaced from the storage position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required to reach the rotator 1236. Therefore, a short opening operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is performed at a timing (for example, timings t4, t6, t8, etc.) at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the discharge position. When it is performed, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation that does not allow the prize winning opening 1155 to win. Further, at the timing (for example, timings t3, t9, etc.) at which the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 is displaced from the discharge position to the accommodation position, the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is short-opened. In such a case, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation for winning the prize winning opening 1155.

In addition, in order to realize the above-described excellent winning performance when a small winning (advantageous small winning) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery,
The number of game balls that can be habitually present as a prize waiting state on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state is “N (in this embodiment, a maximum of 3)”,
The upper limit winning number setting value of the game ball that is allowed to enter the inner area of the accessory winning opening 1155 when the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened is set to “X (this implementation) In the form of 10) ”, and“ Y (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) ”as the time of the game ball firing interval
When the time setting value allowed as the operation time to the open state by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is set to be shorter than “X · Y (6 seconds in this embodiment)”. Is set as T (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds). On this basis, the operation to the open state by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is “X / N (in this embodiment, 4 which is the smallest integer larger than“ 10/3 ”). The game ball that is executed in divided Z times (in this embodiment, five times in this embodiment), and in which each operation mode is executed in the divided Z times can be maintained in the above-mentioned prize waiting state. The total of the short opening times is not more than the T time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds), but the X pieces (in this embodiment, It is possible to execute the opening optimization control for opening the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) so that ten (10) game balls can enter the inner area of the prize winning opening 1155. It is required to do so.

  According to such a configuration, the action to the open state by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is Z times (0.12 seconds in this embodiment) in the short open time (this embodiment). In this case, the game balls that are waiting for winning (in this embodiment, a maximum of three) will enter the internal area each time they are divided into five times. While the total time does not exceed the T time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds), the “X” (10 in this embodiment) game balls are placed inside the bonus winning award 1155. It becomes possible to enter the area, and such excellent prize-winning performance can suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Therefore, the number of game balls that can be regularly present as a prize waiting state on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state is not necessarily two or more (2, 3). . For example, even when a configuration such as “at least one game ball is placed in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state”, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is selected. As long as the game is continued (right-handed game is continued) so that the game ball is present (waiting for winning) in the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the (door portion 1221a), a certain distribution is made. A game ball enters the internal area of the winning combination winning opening 1155 at an accurate timing guided to the V winning opening 1156 by the rotating body (distributing device) 1236 that performs the operation (see FIG. 142 (e)). Therefore, it is possible to start a big hit game according to the acceptance to the V winning opening 1156 (big hit control). That is, in this case, it has a structure managed so that the maximum speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed “L / T”.

  Further, even when such a configuration (at least one game ball is placed in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state) basically, Only a game ball that already exists as a prize waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) can enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. For the time (a short time during which a game ball that is not in a waiting state for winning a prize is rejected), the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state. It is more desirable to make it possible to more accurately control the timing when a game ball enters the inner area of the accessory prize winning opening 1155.

  In addition, the machine lottery probability in the case of adopting such a configuration (at least one or more game balls are in a prize waiting state on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state) is also preferably used. It is possible to set with a low probability value of “1/10” or less.

In other words, when performing the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 divided into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time between them,
-As the predetermined closing interval time, a time longer than one firing interval and shorter than two firing intervals (for example, 0.66 seconds)), and as the short opening time, The time required for a game ball waiting for winning to spill into the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding operation of the winning prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0. 0). 12 seconds), a short opening action appears every time the game balls that are sequentially fired are placed in a prize waiting state at the predetermined closing interval time. In other words, in this case, although the short opening operation is shorter than the firing interval (in the calculation, the expected value to win is less than one), each time the short opening operation is repeated 10 times, it is in a waiting state for winning. One game ball (two in rare cases) will win, and only one of these game balls will be accepted by the V winning opening 1156, so that the machine lottery probability is approximately “1/10 ( In rare cases, it can be set to “less than“ 1/10 ””.

  Furthermore, while the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 can be executed by dividing it into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time, instead of the above configuration (b), ( B) If an internal passage is provided in which the time required for the game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the prize winning sensor 1224 is longer than the time of the launch interval. Even when the tenth game ball has entered the inner area of the prize winning hole 1155 when the first short opening action appears, the tenth game ball is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 1224. Before reaching the position, the eleventh game ball can be made to enter the inner area of the bonus winning award 1155 by the eleventh short opening operation. That is, in this case, even when a configuration such as “at least one game ball is placed in a waiting state for winning on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state”, it is possible to win. It is possible to positively generate an overflow prize for the upper limit value of the game balls (up to 10 in the small hit game).

  Further, various structures of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and various controls in the small hit game according to this embodiment are applied to the structure of the big winning opening / closing member 1203 and the control in the big hit game, respectively. You may make it do. That is, in this case, a game ball is habitually present on the upper surface of the large winning opening / closing member 1203 in the closed state as a waiting state for winning, or a gaming ball per unit time when the large winning opening 1154 is open. The number of winnings of the game is dramatically increased, the speed of the winning situation at the big winning opening 1154 is increased, or the overflow winning for the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won in the big hit game is positively generated. It is possible to obtain excellent operational effects such as, etc. in jackpot games.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the first start port 1152, a lottery on the first special symbol side is performed. In the lottery on the first special symbol side, The probability that “winning” is obtained by the big hit is higher than the probability that “winning” is obtained by the big hit (here, the first advantageous small hit). Therefore, in a gaming state in which the time-saving function does not operate (normal gaming state), a big-hitting game is usually performed when a big-hit is won in response to the reception of the game ball to the first start port 1152, and consequently the time-saving function. Transition control is performed to a gaming state (time-short gaming state) in which is operated.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which a game ball cannot be received at the second start port 1153 in a game state where the time-shortening function does not operate (normal game state) regardless of the result of the normal lottery. As described above, it is possessed. According to such a structure, the lottery on the second special symbol side, which is put on hold when in the gaming state in which the short-time function operates (short-time gaming state), is digested when in the short-time gaming state. Or it is digested only under any of the conditions of being carried over at the time of controlling the transition to the normal gaming state and digested in the normal gaming state.

  In other words, in this case, unless a “winning” is obtained in the first special symbol side lottery in the normal gaming state, the short-time gaming state does not occur and the second special symbol side lottery is not performed. As a result, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be positioned as a relatively rare event, and as a result, the lottery content can be set to a very advantageous game condition.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the big hit game according to the result of the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed, the time until the special symbol lottery is consumed 100 times is shortened. While the gaming state can be continued, in the lottery on the second special symbol side, the second advantageous small hit is obtained with a probability of approximately 1/6. Further, in the short-time gaming state, only the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side can be continuously executed. Therefore, when the short-time gaming state is controlled, the special symbol lottery is normally 100. Prior to being digested, the second advantageous small hit will be obtained by the lottery on the second special symbol side.

  And in the small hit game according to the fact that this second advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to make a right-hand hit, a lot of game balls are played in the short opening time. It is possible to enter the winning opening 1155, and any one of many gaming balls is always supplied to the V winning opening 1156, and other gaming balls are supplied to the lose hole 1230c. This is as described above (see FIG. 142 (c)). That is, in this case, the probability of accepting the V prize opening 1156 (probability of the mechanical lottery) when a game ball enters the prize winning prize opening 1155 is preferably reduced, while the probability of accepting it to the prize winning prize opening 1155 is reduced. A big hit game advantageous to the player can be generated by entering the game ball. However, as described above, after the big hit game corresponding to the lottery on the second special symbol side when in the short-time game state is performed, the game state is controlled so that the short-time function does not operate (normal game state). It is like that.

  According to such a configuration, when the big hit game corresponding to the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed in the normal gaming state, the short-time gaming state occurs, and at this time the second advantageous state in the short gaming state It is almost determined that events such as the fact that the big hit game is played again by obtaining the small hit, and that the game is controlled to the normal game state after the big hit game is played again, etc. The gameability such as whether or not “winning” can be obtained by lottery on the second special symbol side carried over at the time of transition control from the state to the normal game state will be realized. Then, it is important to perform processing on the normal symbol side so that the lottery on the second special symbol side is positioned as a relatively rare event. Hereinafter, the process on the normal symbol side will be described.

[Regarding normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an example of the normal control process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the on state and the game ball has passed to the gate portion 1134, as shown in FIG. In step S2010, the main control MPU 4100a first executes a gate section passing process such as obtaining a normal random number of a normal symbol from a random number counter and storing it in a normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e.

  Next, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S2100).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S2300).
4). Stop normal symbol fluctuation display so that the normal symbol display 1189 displays the normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol fluctuation control stoppage. Normal symbol stop processing to be performed (step S2400)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per game”, by sliding the start door member 1214 to the appearance position, the game area 1100 Ordinary electric accessory opening process for executing a process of forming a bridge passage connecting the flow path of the game ball and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) (step S2500)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage process (step S2010).

  If it is determined in the process of step S2001 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate portion 1134, as shown in FIG. In step S2011, the main control MPU 4100a first acquires a counter value based on the normal hold count counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S2011, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S2012 to S2014 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Will be done. That is, first, as the processing in step S2012, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S2013, a normal random number and a common variable random number are acquired from a random number counter. Then, in step S2014, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S2011 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S2100).

  When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 145, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the normal hold number counter as the process of step S2101. It is determined whether or not there is a variation display control of the normal symbol that is in a suspended state based on the counter value obtained by. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is then processed in step S2102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, normal random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM 4100e. Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) related to are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 1134 in order from the first (first) area. To do. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 1134, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence).

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state (YES in step S2105), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a short-time normal figure hit determination table (not shown) (step S2106). If the current gaming state is a non-short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) (NO in step S2105), a non-time-shortage ordinary figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107), and The determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2102 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2108).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is short-time and used when the gaming state is non-short-time. And a non-time-saving common figure determination table. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the common figure per-judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number is a short-time per-normal figure judgment table and a non-short-time per-normal figure judgment table. In any of the above cases, all 255 normal random numbers coincide with the decision value per common figure indicating that it was won per ordinary figure, and do not coincide with the misplacement judgment value indicating that it is out of the normal figure. As described above, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other. Therefore, when a game ball passes to the gate portion 1134, the game ball is always elected regardless of the game state, and the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (isolated island type) The start opening door member 1214 is controlled to slide to the appearance position so that a bridge passage connecting the winning opening) is formed.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, the game ball cannot enter the second start port 1153, while in the short-time game state, the first It is important to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 1153 than to the start port 1152, and the probability of hitting a normal symbol is the reason that the configuration can be realized. May be set as appropriate.

  Then, if the main control MPU 4100a determines that it is per the normal map as a result of the comparison between the selected per-normal map determination table and the ordinary random number (step S2109), the change is won per the normal map. Is set (step S2110), and a symbol per symbol is determined as a mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S2112). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol per table and the normal random number is determined to be out of order, if the normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is stopped, Determine (step S2111). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) (step S2113), this process is terminated.

[About the operation mode of the start door member 1214 in the normal gaming state when a win is obtained]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to prevent the game ball from entering the second start port 1153 in the normal game state.

  As described above, the second start port 1153 according to this embodiment is a remote island type winning port provided in a position away from the flow path where game balls can flow down in the game area 1100. Is provided. On the other hand, when it can appear and retreat by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and when it is in the appearance position of the submerged position and the appearance position, the flow down path and the second start port 1153 ( To the second starting port 1153 (remote island type prize opening) that is provided as a bridge passage connecting the remote island type prize opening) and is located in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction. By providing the start door member 1214 (tonbolo movable member) provided to roll, it is possible to strictly distinguish between the operation that allows the game ball to be bridged and the operation that does not allow the game ball to be used. Realized.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when a normal game is achieved in the normal gaming state, the operation time of the start port door member 1214 is set on the flow path in the gaming area 1100. A time shorter than the winning threshold time required to reach the third guide portion 1214c after the rolling of the game ball in the first guide portion 1214a starts (for example, 0.088 seconds). Be sure to choose. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, each time a normal winning is obtained, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port) are caused by the sliding operation by the start port member 1214. The bridge passage (the upper surface of the start door member 1214) connecting the two will appear. However, this bridging passage (the upper surface of the start-up door member 1214) slides so that the game ball from the flow-down path always disappears and spills out before the game ball crosses over.

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, a game ball is not received by the second start port 1153 by the operation of the start port member 1214, but when the start port member 1214 operates, Since a bridging passage connecting the flow path of the game ball in the region 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) is formed, the game ball can roll in the bridging passage. The expectation for winning a prize at the second start port 1153 is naturally increased, so that a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

[About the operation mode of the start door member 1214 in the case where the winning figure is obtained in the short-time gaming state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to make it easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 1153 in the short-time game state.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when a normal hit is obtained in the short-time gaming state, the operation time of the start port door member 1214 is on the flow path in the gaming area 1100. A time (for example, 1.5 seconds) that is longer than the winning threshold time required for the game ball at the start of rolling at the first guide portion 1214a to reach the third guide portion 1214c. Be sure to choose. That is, in this case, even in the short-time gaming state, each time the normal figure is obtained, the flow path of the game ball in the gaming area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (remote island type winning port) by the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214 A bridge passage (an upper surface of the start-up door member 1214) appears. However, in addition to this, if the right strike is continued, at least one of the game balls from the flow-down path (here, the time (1 at which at least two game balls cross over the firing interval of 0.6 seconds) .5 seconds) crosses this bridge passage (the upper surface of the start door member 1214) and is received by the second start opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening), and disappears after the reception, and the bridge The sliding operation is performed so as to spill game balls in the passage (the upper surface of the start door member 1214).

  According to such a configuration, in the short-time gaming state, every time the start port door member 1214 is operated, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start port 1153 (remote island type winning port) are provided. Since the game ball that has crossed the connecting bridge passage is received by the second start port 1153, the game ball can easily enter the second start port 1153.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the stage where the start opening of the start opening door member 1214 is started and the winning to the second start opening 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, A system is constructed with a structure in which a brake is automatically applied to a speed toward the second start port 1153 by a frictional force according to contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Therefore, in addition to control related to the operation of the start door member 1214, such an automatic brake system also increases the certainty related to non-winning when performing an operation that does not allow bridging of game balls. Further, even when a relatively long bridge passage is realized as the start port door member 1214, the second start is started from the time when the start port member 1214 starts to move backward (displacement from the appearance position to the sunk position). Immediacy until the entrance into the mouth 1153 cannot actually be performed can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the game balls on the flow path in the gaming area 1100 are moved by the first guide portion 1214a as the operation time of the start door member 1214. Only a time (unfavorable game mode) shorter than a winning threshold time required to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting rolling can be selected. However, in the normal gaming state, as the operation time of the start door member 1214, the third guide unit after the game ball on the flow path in the game area 1100 starts rolling on the first guide unit 1214a. A time longer than the winning threshold time required to reach 1214c may be selected with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in this case, when in the normal gaming state, an advantageous gaming mode in which a random number for the second special symbol (highly accurate start information) can be put on hold up to a predetermined number can appear. The second special symbol lottery (the game on the side where the probability of obtaining a big hit game is increased) that has been put on hold while being in the mode has been made after the advantageous game mode has ended (winning is possible) After the operation by the start port door member 1214 for a time longer than the threshold time is completed, the digestion can be performed. As described above, the probability that a big hit game can be generated while the four second special symbol lotteries in the holding state are being digested (the probability that either a big hit or an advantageous small win is obtained) is 50. Since a high probability of at least%, it is possible to enjoy such a high-probability lottery game while in the normal gaming state.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 146, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis process in step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S1102, the control process related to the effect display device 1115 is executed based on the reception of the change pattern command transmitted by setting the change pattern (step S409).

  In the sound control process in step S1103, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 are executed. In the lamp control process in step S1104, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3041 is executed. In the random number update process of step S1106, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1101-step S1106 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady processing to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady processing (command of step S1101). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[Display effect in effect display device 1115]
About the display effect in the effect display apparatus 1115 of this embodiment, the control example concerning the effect is demonstrated.

  For example, on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, three decorative symbols (three decorative symbol sequences) that are variably displayed in the vertical direction and a background image that appears behind these decorative symbols are displayed in an effect manner.

  Here, the control procedure for the display effect in the effect display device 1115 is as follows. That is, now, assuming that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the main control board 4100 first performs determination processing for the big hit based on the special random number already acquired at this time. In this determination process, not only the determination of winning the big hit, but also the number of rounds of the big hit game performed when it is determined that the big hit is won, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit game (short-time gaming state and Whether or not) is also made. However, the determination on winning the big hit is made based on the winning random number for special determination, whereas the round number and the game state are determined based on the design random number in the special random number. .

  Next, in the main control board 4100, the variation time of the special symbol is calculated based on the result of the determination on winning the big hit and the variable random number already acquired at this time (acquired based on winning at the start opening). decide.

  Then, the main control board 4100 outputs the result information thus determined and determined to the peripheral control unit 4140. Accordingly, the peripheral control unit 4140 performs control related to the display effect in the effect display device 1115 based on the result information thus output from the main control board 4100.

  That is, in the peripheral control unit 4140, first of all the result information from the main control board 4100, based on the result information regarding the winning of the big hit, an effect table dedicated to the winning of the big hit and an effect dedicated to the time of the big hit being lost Select one of the tables. In these effect tables, the contents of the display effects in the effect display device 1115 are stored in association with each other according to the variation time of the special symbol.

  Therefore, after selecting one of the two effect tables, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects the result information from the main control board 4100 based on the determination information related to the variation time of the special symbol. One of the contents of the display effect memorize | stored in the effect table is selected (judgment).

  Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 outputs information related to the content of the selected display effect to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the display command. As a result, the content of the display effect selected based on the result information from the main control board 4100 appears on the effect display device 1115. At this time, information (command) generated in response to selection of the contents of such display effects is appropriately output to the lamp driving board 3041, the motor driving board 3045, the sound source IC 4140c, etc. Various effects linked with the display effects in the effect display device 1115 are realized.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol combination (a symbol combination that appears as a number of all three decorative symbols) appears on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, it is suggested that the player has won the jackpot. When a symbol combination different from a special symbol combination appears on the display screen of the effect display device 1115 (a symbol combination that appears as a number that does not include all three decorative symbols), it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot. Is done.

  FIG. 148 is a time showing an example of the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment advances the game based on the above-described novel game characteristics and the flow of the production corresponding to the flow. It is a chart. Hereinafter, various processes when a game is advanced in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized.

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, as the operating time of the start port member 1214, the game ball on the flow down path in the game area 1100 is the first guide portion 1214a. Only the time shorter than the winning threshold time required to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting the rolling at can be selected. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball (left strike) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the first start port 1152 is provided instead of the second start port 1153. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, as the operating time of the start door member 1214, the game ball on the flow path in the gaming area 1100 starts rolling on the first guide portion 1214a. Only a time longer than the winning threshold time required to reach the three guide portions 1214c can be selected. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to strike the game ball (right strike) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the second start port 1153 is provided.

  In such a game condition, assuming that the game is currently controlled in the normal game state, the player hits the left and plays a game that causes the game ball to enter the first start port 1152. Will be done. As a result, each time a game ball enters the first start opening 1152, the first special symbol lottery is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit value (four in this case). Then, the first special symbol lottery thus put on hold is digested according to the order in which it was held when the start condition on the first special symbol side was satisfied (FIG. 134: YES in step S302), The first special symbol lottery is performed under the conditions indicated by 141.

  However, as shown in FIG. 141, the result of the first special symbol lottery includes “big hit” and “advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit)” as the winning (winning) for generating the big hit game. Yes, the probability of winning big hits is a low probability such as “1/400”, and the probability of getting advantageous small hits (multiplied value of the small hit probability and the probability of selecting advantageous small hits by type judgment) In general, the probability is very low, such as “1/8571”.

  Therefore, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, basically, “losing” that does not correspond to either “big hit” or “advantageous small winning” is obtained, and based on the result of the “losing” Control is performed such that the first special symbol is varied for the determined variation time, and a stop symbol corresponding to “losing” appears when the variation time has elapsed. However, as a type of such “losing”, in addition to losing, it is possible to obtain a disadvantage per hit with a probability of “1/175”, so a stop symbol corresponding to “losing” appears. In some cases, the control related to the execution of the small hit game at the time of the disadvantage small hit is further performed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an “advantageous hit” is obtained, a game is placed on the upper surface (specific rolling region) of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). It is possible to start a big hit game as long as the game is continued (right-handed game is continued) so that the state where the ball is present (waiting for winning) is maintained, whereas “disadvantage small hit” Is obtained, even if a game ball is won in the prize winning hole 1155, the bonus prize opening / closing member 1221 is arranged so that none of the game balls is distributed to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156. The opening / closing operation is as described above.

  In addition, as described above, when the second unfavorable small hit is obtained, within the period in which the small hit game is performed, the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained up to the middle stage. ) Is obtained, or control for operating the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is performed in an open manner similar to or similar to the case where the above is obtained. Further, at this time, the effect display device 1115 may perform an expected effect that makes it possible to recognize the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained.

  As a result of repeating such a game, if a jackpot (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, a variation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (FIG. 128: Step S402a). Then, after the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern is set in the variation timer (FIG. 128: step S410), the variation of the first special symbol is started.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), when the timing t11 when the variation timer times up arrives, the variation state of the first special symbol is terminated by causing the stop symbol at the time of the big hit to appear. After the stop symbol at the time of big hit, the interval period before the start of the big hit game is generated, and the execution of the big hit game is started based on the elapse of the interval period before the start of the big hit game.

  In the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, only the 15R hour / long jackpot is obtained as the jackpot type, so the above round game is repeated 15 times. The jackpot game is over at the point of time. After that, an end interval of the big hit game is generated, and when the end interval period of the big hit game has elapsed, the time reduction function is activated to control the transition to the short time gaming state (timing t12).

  However, as described above, when a big hit game is performed according to the lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) on the second special symbol side, about 2000 game balls can be obtained. When a big hit game according to the lottery result on the first special symbol side (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) is performed, since only about 400 game balls can be obtained, a relatively short period of time Then, the big hit game is finished and the transition control to the short-time game state is performed.

  In addition, although this was also mentioned above, in the first special symbol lottery, the first advantage small hit is rarely obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery. However, if the big hit game is generated through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the first advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156), the first advantageous small hit is obtained. Regardless of the gaming state at that time, the transition to the short-time gaming state is performed by operating the short-time function when the end interval period of the jackpot game has elapsed (timing t12).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as one of its purposes, a game that can be awarded by a player is executed as one set of big hit games (two big hit games). Thus, not only can the number of prizes that can be obtained per game be doubled compared to the past (up to 4000), but it is possible to pay out such a large number of prizes. There is a case where a set of big hit games (two big hit games) is given a loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate exceeding 50%.

  Therefore, in the short-time game state according to this embodiment, by causing the second start port 1153 to play the game ball (right-handed), as shown in FIG. 141, the big hit game is started. Among the winning (big hit, second advantageous small hit), in particular, the probability that the second advantageous small hit can be obtained is a high probability of 1/6 (the first winning lottery game in the first special symbol lottery ( The second special symbol lottery with a high probability exceeding 10 times the probability of obtaining the big hit and the second advantageous small hit) is performed. As described above, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are held, the second special symbol lottery is digested first regardless of the holding order.

  That is, in this case, the second special symbol lottery is only digested for the upper limit number of reservations (four times), and the probability of winning the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) will exceed 50% Therefore, normally, the transition control to the short-time gaming state is performed, and the second advantageous small hit is obtained at a relatively early timing t13, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested is set to a predetermined upper limit value (100 The gaming condition is such that it is almost impossible to end the short gaming state at that time. Then, through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156), the second stage (second half) of the set of big hit games After the big hit game is generated (timing t14), the normal gaming state is returned (timing t15).

  In addition, as a result of the second special symbol lottery being digested in the short-time game state, a big hit game is generated in the same way when a big hit is won as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) as a hit to start a big hit game After having been made (timing t14), the transition to the normal gaming state is controlled (timing t15).

  According to the game control in such a short-time game state, according to the player's feeling, the transition control to the big hit game at the time of winning in the normal game state (first stage big hit game) and the short-time game state is controlled. Two jackpot games with a jackpot game expected to be obtained immediately (second stage jackpot game) are provided as a set of jackpot games. However, here, the first stage jackpot game is based on the result of the first special symbol lottery, and only 400 game balls can be obtained. As a result, 2400 game balls can be acquired.

  Then, at timing t15 after one set of big hit games (two big hit games) has been provided in this way, the normal game state is restored, but in the normal game state, the game is in the hold state when in the short-time game state. It is possible to digest the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the game (second special symbol lottery) on the side where the probability of obtaining a hit (big hit, second advantage small hit) is dramatically increased while being in the normal game state is reserved. The game can be digested for a few minutes, and until the end of digestion for the reserved number of minutes, the winning of the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is won and the short-time game state is again entered. It is possible to provide a novel gameability such as whether the transition control can be performed (whether one set of big hit games (two big hit games) can be started again).

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when a big hit game (first big hit game) is generated as a result of the lottery in the normal game state, the type of hit (big hit, small hit) Regardless of the type of hit or special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the jackpot game (first stage jackpot game) to start a set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) After this, a short-time gaming state must be generated.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, in the normal game state that is returned after the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is provided, the four second specials that are already in the hold state Even if the probability of winning the big hit (big hit, second advantage small win) is excluded, the probability of winning the big hit game while the symbol lottery is digested is “671/1296” (= 1− (5/6) 4), which allows the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) to be looped with a probability of 50% or more (basically, the advantageous state is continued) Performance).

  And, in the normal gaming state, the second advantageous small hit was won as the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while the four second special symbol lotteries already in the holding state were digested In the case (timing t16), through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156), the big hit game (first big hit game) Is generated (timing t17), and the transition control to the short-time gaming state is performed (timing t18).

  In addition, as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while the four second special symbol lotteries that are already on hold in the normal game state are digested, it was rare but won the big hit In the same manner, after the big hit game (first stage big hit game) is generated (timing t17), the transition control to the short-time gaming state is performed (timing t18).

  As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the second advantageous small hit is usually obtained at a relatively early timing t19. Then, after generating the big hit game (the second stage big hit game) through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156) (Timing t20), the normal gaming state is returned (timing t21).

  As a result of digesting the second special symbol lottery in the short-time game state, as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) for starting the big hit game, although it is rare, the big hit game (two After the big hit game at the stage is generated (timing t20), the transition to the normal gaming state is controlled (timing t21).

  As described above, after the two big hit games are provided as one set of big hit games, in the normal game state, the second special symbol lottery put on hold when in the short-time game state is sequentially digested. By doing so, it is possible to win the winning (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game before the digestion for the number of holdings is completed, and to shift to the short-time gaming state again. (A set of jackpot games (two jackpot games can be restarted) can be started again).

  According to the control (timing t16 to t22) related to one set of big hit games (two big hit games), not only the second level big hit game (timing t20 to t21) but also the first level big hit game. (Timing t17 to t18) can also be performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in every jackpot game, an award that allows 2000 game balls to be obtained is awarded, and through this, one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) is about 4000 times that of the past. Individual game balls can be acquired.

  Then, after one set of big hit games (two big hit games) has been started in this way, every time the game is returned to the normal game state, the big special bonus lottery that has already been put on hold is being digested. As long as the game start (big hit, second advantage small win) is obtained (timing t22), a prize that allows 4000 game balls to be obtained by one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is repeated. Can be granted.

  For example, at timing t22, if the second special symbol lottery is obtained as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) for starting the big hit game as a result of sequentially digesting the second special symbol lottery in the hold state, By generating a big hit game (first stage big hit game) through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the two advantageous small hits (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156) (timing t23) First, 2000 game balls can be acquired.

  When 2000 game balls can be acquired in this way, the transition to the short-time game state is controlled (timing t24). At this time, in the short-time game state, the big hit game is achieved at an early stage without substantially reducing the number of possessed balls. The gaming conditions are such that the hits (big hit, second advantageous small hit) can be obtained again. Therefore, assuming that the second advantageous small hit is obtained at a relatively early timing t25 after the transition control to the short-time gaming state is made, through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (the game ball in the V winning opening 1156) (Based on the fact that the game has been accepted), by generating a jackpot game (a second stage jackpot game) (timing t26), it is possible to obtain an additional 2000 game balls.

  As described above, after the two big hit games are provided as one set of big hit games, in the normal game state, the second special symbol lottery put on hold when in the short-time game state is sequentially digested. By doing so, it is possible to win the winning (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game before the digestion for the number of holdings is completed, and to shift to the short-time gaming state again. (A set of jackpot games (two jackpot games can be restarted) can be started again).

  However, in spite of the fact that such a gameability is provided, even though the second special symbol lottery that has been put on hold when in the short-time game state is sequentially digested, If the player does not win the second advantage small win), the player makes a left-hand strike in the normal gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly put on hold. A game in which a game ball enters the start port 1152 is redone.

  According to such game control, as long as the winning (big hit, advantageous small hit) that generates the big hit game in the normal gaming state is won, two big hit games are played as one set of big hit games. It becomes like this. Each time one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is completed, it is temporarily returned to the normal game state, and one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is generated again with a probability of success of 50% or more. A loop challenge game (up to four second special symbol lotteries that are already on hold) will be performed. In the period when the loop challenge game is performed, although it is returned to the normal game state, it is left-handed only by confirming that up to four second special symbol lotteries that are already on hold are being digested. No games will be played. And as long as it succeeds in generating one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) each time such a loop challenge game is awarded, one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games) is regarded as one unit. While the special game state is repeatedly executed, when the game fails to generate one set of big hit games (two big hit games), the game under the normal game conditions will be redone. Innovative gameplay such as is realized.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the following effects are realized according to the flow of the game when the game is advanced based on such novel game characteristics. Yes.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), an unfavorable game before a game in which one set of big hit games is united is shifted to a special game state that can be looped with a probability of 50% or more. As described above, in the state, the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly performed under the gaming conditions shown in FIG. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first controls the effect display device 1115 so that the symbol variation effect (loss variation) according to the result of the first special symbol lottery appears repeatedly.

  However, in the rare case where such a symbol variation effect (losing variation) is repeatedly performed, the symbol at the time of a disadvantageous small hit may stop. And, as described above, when the second disadvantageous small hit among the disadvantageous small hits is obtained, it is the same as the case where the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained until the middle stage in the small hit game, or Since the control for operating the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is performed in an approximate open mode, the effect display device 1115 also shows an expected effect that can make the user aware of the possibility that the first advantage small hit is obtained. Will be controlled as follows.

  In addition, even if the first advantageous small hit (1/8571) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the effect display device is the same as the case where the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained. In 1115, control is performed so that an expected effect that can make the user aware of the possibility that the first advantage small hit is obtained appears. However, it is possible to recognize that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by causing an effect image different from the case where the second disadvantageous small hit is obtained after the timing t8 shown in FIG. It will be.

  Then, as a result of such a game being repeatedly performed, when the jackpot (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the fluctuation at the jackpot time acquired from the main control MPU 4100a. An effect pattern corresponding to the pattern is selected, and control is performed so as to appear as a fluctuating effect up to timing t11.

  Then, when the stop symbol at the time of the big hit appears at the timing t11, assuming that the first special game state (one set of big hit games (two big hit games)) has started, A first-half bonus effect indicating that the first half of the stage jackpot game (the first stage jackpot game) is being performed is caused to appear.

  As a result, when the first stage jackpot game ends at the timing t12, the above-mentioned one set of jackpot game (in the controlled short-time gaming state prior to the start of the second stage jackpot game ( A loop challenge preparation effect is performed to increase the probability of continuing a big hit game) to a probability value of 50% or more.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a performance that makes it possible to loop the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) with a probability of 50% or more. The second special symbol lottery (the lottery on the side where the winning of the big hit game can be obtained with high probability) is performed with the upper limit holding number while the time reduction function is operating before returning to the normal gaming state. This is realized by setting up to four hold states.

  For example, if the number of the second special symbol lottery held is only 3 and the game is returned to the normal gaming state, the big special game will start as the second special symbol lottery in the three holding states is digested. The probability of winning (big hit, second advantage small hit) is almost “91/216” (= 1− (5/6) 3), ignoring the big hit probability as an error. The big hit game (two big hit games) can only be looped with a probability of less than 50%.

  Therefore, in the loop challenge preparation effect, first, when the timing t12 arrives, an effect display indicating that the player should aim for winning at the second starting port 1153 appears by right-handed, and at the second starting port 1153, On the basis of the second special symbol lottery, the decorative symbols (three decorative symbol sequences) are displayed in a variable manner. Then, unless the winning for starting the big hit game is not obtained in the second special symbol lottery, a lost symbol (a symbol display that is not a set of three) that indicates that the symbol is lost when the symbol is stopped appears. .

  However, normally, as the winning of the big hit game in the second special symbol lottery, since the second advantageous small hit is obtained at an early stage, a winning symbol (a set of three is shown) that indicates that the winning is when the symbol stops (Design display) will appear. In addition, after an effect image (for example, a set of three symbols) showing that a small hit is displayed, an interval period before the start of the small hit game occurs, and the interval before the start of the small hit game is generated. As described above, the execution of the small hit game is started based on the elapse of the period.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when an effect image (for example, a set of three symbols displayed) indicating that the winning is made in the short-time gaming state appears, the effect display device 1115 causes the small winning game. In many cases, a chance to win the prize winning opening 1155 is not missed by causing an effect display (preparation effect) indicating that the winning prize winning opening 1155 should be aimed at. It was.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when an effect image (for example, a set of three symbols displayed) indicating that a small win is won in the short-time gaming state appears, An effect display indicating that a prize should be aimed at the second start opening 1153 is displayed instead of the prize winning opening 1155 to be opened.

  In other words, the effect image showing that the small win has been won is due to the result of the lottery obtained by digesting the second special symbol lottery that was on hold, so at this point in time It is highly likely that the number of reserved special symbol lotteries has not reached at least the upper limit (four) (there is at most one less than the upper limit). On the other hand, in the small hit game, as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the condition device does not operate. Therefore, unlike the big hit game (FIGS. 139 and 140), the operation of the time reduction function is performed. There is no such thing as starting or stopping.

  Therefore, when an effect image showing that a small win is displayed, first, if an effect display indicating that a winning to the second starting port 1153 should be aimed at appears, the player can make a right strike. Done. The right-handed game ball has a time-shortening function until the bonus winning hole 1155 is opened by the small hit game (until the interval period before the start of the small hit game ends). Among them, the second winning opening 1153 can be received with high probability through the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state.

  As a result, the second special symbol lottery is put on hold up to the upper limit hold number of 4 and then the small hit game is started (timing t13), so that the second stage big hit game can be started. Therefore (timing t14), when the second stage jackpot game is completed and returned to the normal gaming state (timing t15), such a special gaming state (one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games)) It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes possible to loop only with a probability of less than 50%.

  It should be noted that the effect image indicating that the winning of the small win is not necessarily displayed as a set of three symbols, for example, it may appear in the middle of the variation of the decorative symbol. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to prompt a prize to the second starting port 1153 in the middle of the change of the symbol, a time margin is created, and the second special symbol lottery is the upper limit number of reserves. It is more reliably avoided that the small hit game starts or the second stage big hit game starts without being able to enter the hold state up to four.

  As described above, the loop challenge preparation effect according to this embodiment is a stage where even the start of the big hit game has not yet been promised (although the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the V winning opening 1156 In addition to the fact that no game balls are accepted in the game, the inconvenience after the big hit game occurs when the big hit game is temporarily generated from the stage where even the prize winning opening 1155 is not yet opened by the small hit game) The player is encouraged to make a predetermined preparation so that the above-described novel gameplay is realized.

  Moreover, according to such a loop challenge preparation effect, prior to the start of the small hit game, the game ball of the game ball passes through the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. I'm trying to make it come out. Accordingly, game balls that are in a waiting state for a prize will continue to exist on the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) in the closed state, so that when a small hit game is started, a prize is already given. The game ball in the waiting state can be made to enter the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the interval period before the start of the small hit game, an effect of prompting the winning to the second start port 1153 is performed. A period during which the winning to the second starting port 1153 is prompted during the variation time of the decorative symbol corresponding to the winning may be provided, or it may extend over both the variation time and the pre-start interval period. Thus, a period in which a prize is awarded to the second start port 1153 may be provided.

  In the loop challenge preparation effect, after the effect display for prompting the winning at the second start opening 1153 is performed, the winning at the accessory winning opening 1155 is prompted before the small hit game is started. An effect display may be further performed.

  Then, after such a loop challenge preparation effect is performed, at timing t14, the second half of the first stage jackpot game and the second stage jackpot game (second stage jackpot game) is performed. Appears the second half bonus production that is shown to be in the situation.

  As a result, when the second stage jackpot game is completed at timing t15, a maximum of four second special symbol lotteries that are put on hold in the period of the loop challenge preparation effect and the like are controlled in the normal game state. In the course of being digested in sequence, is it possible to win the win (big hit, second advantage small hit) to start the big hit game and to control the transition again to the short-time game state (one set of big hit games) (Can the big hit game for 2 times be started again)? A loop challenge effect is made to make the player aware of such things.

  Such a loop challenge effect can be realized, for example, as an effect such as whether a specific symbol stop mode can appear while executing symbol variation four times. That is, in this case, when the second advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, when the symbol stop mode corresponding to the second advantageous small hit appears (the game ball at the V winning opening 1156) Is not accepted, and in the stage where even the prize winning opening 1155 is not yet opened by the small hit game, the second special game state is generated (one set of big hit games (two big hit games) (Success effect).

  It should be noted that, despite such uncertainties regarding the progress of the game, the background that such a successful performance can be executed is as shown in FIGS. 142 (d) and 142 (e). When an advantageous small hit is obtained, “If at least one game ball enters the inner area of the winning prize winning opening 1155, it is guided to the V winning opening 1156 (timing t3 to t4), This is nothing more than the fact that “a plurality of opening operations are executed in the form of a relatively long closing interval that can create a game ball waiting for winning”. In other words, in this case, even if there is one game ball between timings t3 and t4 (more precisely, after timing t3 and until the fifth opening operation is completed), the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 ( When reaching the door portion 1221a), regardless of whether the door is opened or closed, the game ball enters the inner area of the accessory winning port 1155 and the game ball is guided to the V winning port 1156, respectively. It can be confirmed.

  Then, every time a success effect appears in the loop challenge effect, the game is controlled to a new special game state. Therefore, as in the case of the above-described effect example (timing t11 to t16), the game progresses in the special game state. At the same time, the first half bonus production, the loop challenge preparation production, the second half bonus production, and the loop challenge production are executed sequentially.

  However, in the loop challenge production, the success production does not appear, and up to four second special symbol lotteries that are on hold are being digested in sequence, so that the big hit game starts (big hit, second advantageous small hit) When the winning is not achieved (timing t28), the game state is shifted to an unfavorable gaming state. In other words, in this case, while the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly performed under the game conditions shown in FIG. 141, the effect display device 1115 also has a symbol variation effect (usually according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) The control is performed so that the variation in loss) appears repeatedly.

  By the way, in the second special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, among the hits (big hit, second advantageous small hit) for starting the big hit game, in particular, the probability of obtaining the second advantageous small hit is as high as 1/6. It is considered a probability. Therefore, when the player is in the special game state described above, it is not possible to make an advance determination on the result of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state and perform an effect based on the advance determination (so-called pre-read effect). It seems to be effective in improving interest.

  However, during the period in which the loop challenge preparation effect is performed, the state in which the big hit game is not yet committed (for example, the game ball is not yet held in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, V When such a pre-reading effect is performed when the game ball is not yet guaranteed to be guided to the winning opening 1156, the following problem occurs.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability of obtaining the second advantageous small hit is set to a high probability of 1/6, and among the maximum number of four holdings for the second special symbol lottery It is set as a probability setting that can be sufficiently expected to generate a state of winning a small hit (advantageous small hit) with a plurality of.

  In this regard, when the pre-reading effects for each result of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state appear in a state where it is not yet committed to generate the big hit game, for example, a plurality of second special symbols Even if a small hit game is played until it is shown that the small win (advantageous small hit) is won by lottery, it is a big hit by preventing the game ball from entering the prize winning hole 1155 There is a concern that a gaming technique of not generating a game will be adopted. That is, in this case, although the upper limit number of times (100 times) required for the variation of the special symbol that can be continued as the short-time gaming state is set, the above-mentioned gaming technique is within a range that does not end the short-time gaming state due to the balance with the upper limit number of times. If it is used successfully, the set value for payout as the pachinko machine 1 may be exceeded, which may cause a disadvantage on the hall side.

  Therefore, when performing the pre-reading effect for each result of the second special symbol lottery in the hold state in the special game state described above, it is performed at a timing after it is ensured that the big hit game is generated. It is desirable to make it. In this case, in addition to the promised big hit game, there is a possibility that four big hit games, which is the upper limit of the number of reserves in the second special symbol lottery, may be further performed. It is possible to recognize that it is possible to acquire 10,000 game balls from now.

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, a game in which a prize can be obtained by a player is executed as one set of big hit games (two big hit games). is there.

  Therefore, for example, when performing a pre-reading effect on each result of the second special symbol lottery that is in a pending state at a timing after it is ensured that a big hit game is generated during the period in which the loop challenge preparation effect is performed Is the promising jackpot game is “the second stage jackpot game in the current special game state” and won the first look-ahead (per hitting the jackpot game (big hit, second advantage small hit)) The jackpot game indicated by the winning game is “the first jackpot game in the next special gaming state” and the jackpot game indicated by the second look-ahead is “the next special gaming state. Is the second stage jackpot game ", and the third jackpot game shown per prefetch is" the first stage jackpot game in the next special game state " Is jackpot gaming represented by fourth per prefetching a "jackpot gaming of the second stage in the special game state of after next".

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “second stage jackpot game” can be executed automatically when the “first stage jackpot game” is performed. Is determined. Therefore, as a result of such a pre-reading effect, when the pre-reading per win is obtained in one of the second special symbol lotteries in the hold state, and in the second special symbol lottery in the hold state In the case where the pre-reading win is obtained with both of the two, at this point in time, it is possible to start two jackpot games (the first stage jackpot game and the second stage jackpot game in the next special gaming state) It can be said that it is the same in that it is determined that it is possible. Similarly, as a result of such a pre-reading effect, when the pre-reading win is obtained in three of the second special symbol lotteries that are put on hold, and the second special that is put on hold. In the case where the pre-reading win is obtained in four of the symbol lotteries, at this point in time, all of the four jackpot games (the first stage jackpot game and the second stage jackpot game in the next special gaming state, and It can be said that it is the same in that it is determined that it is possible to start the first stage jackpot game and the second stage jackpot game in the next special game state.

  However, in practice, two of the second special symbol lotteries in the holding state are more than the case where the pre-reading win is obtained only in one of the second special symbol lotteries in the holding state. Therefore, the expected value of the number of prizes that can be obtained by the player may be lower when the prefetch per win is obtained.

  For example, within the period from timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, the second special symbol lottery that is digested first and the second special symbol lottery among the second special symbol lotteries in the four holding states are digested second. The second special symbol lottery, which is prefetched in the second special symbol lottery, is the second special symbol lottery that is digested third, and the second special symbol lottery that is digested fourth. Suppose that there is a situation in which a production result is shown in which no prefetching is obtained. Then, in the loop challenge effect starting from timing t15, the second special game state is generated based on the result of the second special symbol lottery to be digested first (per prefetch) (one set of big hit games ( It will be shown that it has succeeded in re-starting the two big hit games).

  However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery to be digested second, the second special symbol lottery to be digested third, and the second special symbol lottery to be digested fourth are all left in the hold state. Will be. Therefore, when the short-time gaming state is started at timing t18, the second special symbol lottery that is digested second is digested first, and based on the result (per prefetch), one set of jackpot gaming The second stage jackpot game is started (timing t20).

  However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery that is digested third and the second special symbol lottery that is digested fourth are all left in the hold state. Therefore, in the loop challenge effect starting from timing t21, even if the four second special symbol lotteries are put on hold, the two second special symbol lotteries with the fastest digestion order are digested third. The second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be digested fourth, and it has been clarified that the pre-reading perception has not been obtained. In other words, in this case, it is apparent that it is only possible to have the expectation that the special gaming state is looped only in the two second special symbol lotteries added as the holding state after the pre-reading effect is performed. is there.

  On the other hand, in the period of the timing t13-t14 shown in FIG. 148, it is only one of the 2nd special symbol lotteries made into a reservation state among the 2nd special symbol lotteries in a reservation state. If the pre-reading win is not obtained, the second special game state is generated by the second special symbol lottery in which the pre-reading win is obtained (one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is started again) )

  However, at this time, even if the second special symbol lottery where the pre-reading perception is not obtained is left as a pending state, the remaining second special symbol lottery is all lost in the short-time gaming state starting from timing t18. You will stay digested. That is, in this case, in addition to being won when the big hit game is started at a relatively early stage by the second special symbol lottery newly placed in the hold state in the short-time game state, a loop started from the timing t21 Also in the challenge production, it is possible to have an expectation that the special game state is looped in all of the four second special symbol lotteries newly put on hold.

  In this way, when a pre-reading win is obtained in one of the second special symbol lotteries in the hold state, the special game state can be looped even in the loop challenge effect starting from the timing t21. While the probability of being able to exceed 50%, if a pre-reading win is obtained in two of the second special symbol lotteries that are put on hold, a special game will be played in a loop challenge effect starting from timing t21. Since the probability that the state can be looped is generally “11/36” (= 1− (5/6) 2), the expected value of the award that can be obtained by the player is lower than the expected value. Obviously.

  According to such a configuration, among the second special symbol lotteries that are put on hold, it may be disadvantageous for the player to win the larger number for winning the big hit game. It becomes possible to make this a novel as a look-ahead effect based on the above.

  On the other hand, according to such a configuration, in the period of the timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, among the second special symbol lotteries in the four holding states, prefetching is performed by three second special symbol lotteries. If the winning can be obtained, the same effect can be obtained as when the prefetching winning can be obtained by the four second special symbol lotteries. In other words, in this case, it is recognized that it is possible to acquire 10,000 game balls by performing five big hit games including the promised big hit game (the big hit game starting from timing t14). Will be able to. Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if it is possible to acquire 10,000 game balls by performing five big hit games, this is more than the probability (1/400) that a big hit can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to fully expect the game, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment.

[Re-explanation of the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155]
The game ball T received in the prize winning prize opening 1155 is sent to the upper port 1238b side opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and the rotating body reaches the upper port 1238b when the gaming ball T reaches the upper port 1238b. When the receiving portion 1236a of 1236 is positioned in the storage position facing upward, the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper port 1238b, and the rotating body 1236 rotates and receives in this state. When the part 1236a rotates to the release position facing rightward, the game ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V winning opening 1156, which is different from the bonus winning opening 1155 (a big hit game) ) Will be given, and the player can be entertained by the given privilege, and the V prize opening 115 is received via the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the game ball T is accepted in the game, a privilege is granted. Therefore, whether or not the game ball T received in the prize winning prize opening 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is determined. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the V prize opening 1156, and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  When the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 is advanced or retracted, the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 that rotates around the 1233a and meshes with the driving gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the driving gear member 1233 rotates in the direction opposite to the driving gear member 1233. As the driven gear member 1234 rotates, the rotating body 1236 rotates between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 is increased compared to the case where the rotating body 1236 is rotated by a motor as in a conventional pachinko machine. Even if it is going to take the timing of the game ball T so as to be accommodated, the timing can be made difficult. Therefore, the game ball T can be made difficult to be accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so that the game ball T can be made difficult to be received in the V winning opening 1156, and the privilege due to the reception into the V winning opening 1156 can be increased. It is possible to suppress the increase of the burden on the game hall side by reducing the number of grants.

  Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotating body 1236) is made larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. Compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, since the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 increases, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T so that the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is taken. Can be difficult.

  In addition, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, a lose hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T circulated from the accessory prize winning opening 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when not in the storage position. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the accessory winning award 1155. Accordingly, even if the game ball T is intruded into the prize winning award 1155 by some illegal act, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the reception unit 1236a as long as the reception unit 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the accommodation position. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being granted illegally and to reduce the burden on the game hall due to the illegal act. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the normal state in which the prize winning opening 1155 cannot be received, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 rotates to the V winning opening 1156 side that coincides with the right portion opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is allowed to enter the prize winning opening 1155, it can be recognized at a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to prevent cheating by deceiving the act.

  In addition, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than before, even if the game ball T is illegally received in the V prize opening 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body 1236 rotates faster. By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it seem that it is difficult to make the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236 receive the illegal game ball T at first glance, and to stop the fraud The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the above can be obtained. Moreover, since fraud can be prevented, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the receiving position to the discharging position, the game ball T stored in the receiving portion 1236a. Even if a centrifugal force due to rotation acts on the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a between the receiving position and the discharging position, the game ball T is removed from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force because the peripheral wall portion 1238a is closed. Jumping out can be prevented, and the game ball T can be reliably moved to the release position. Further, since the game ball T can be prevented from jumping out from the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating rotating body 1236 by the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be further increased, It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects by making it difficult to take the timing of the body 1236.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is changed according to the game state that is changed when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning slot unit 1220A of the prize winning unit 1220 is movable so that the bonus winning slot 1155 can accept the game ball T). In this state, when the game ball T is received at the prize winning port 1155, a bonus such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls T is given, so the game ball T aimed at the bonus game prize port 1155 is given to the player. You can entertain and entertain. When the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the prize winning hole 1155 is received by the prize winning hole 1155, a privilege is given, and the player is further enjoyed by the given privilege. Can do. The game ball T received in the prize winning port 1155 is guided to the upper port 1238b formed on the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning port unit 1220B. The rotating body 1236 comes into contact with the upper opening 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, and when the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the right port 1238c, From the receiving part 1236a to the right guiding part 1238f through the right part opening 1238c, guided to the right guiding part 1238f and received by the V prize opening 1156, and a privilege such as a big hit game is given, The player can be more entertained, and the interest can be suppressed from decreasing. Since this rotator 1236 has only one receiving portion 1236a, it is possible to prevent a loss that is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 as compared to a case where a rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions like a conventional pachinko machine. Since there is no receiving portion 1236a, the pachinko machine 1 is easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the driving operation of the game ball T. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and the game can be enjoyed on the pachinko machine 1, and the player's interest is prevented from lowering. can do.

  In addition, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, the rotating body 1236 has a larger number of receiving portions than the conventional case. The outer diameter can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236 is increased, and the rotating body 1236 is placed in an effective place. Can be arranged. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated about the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end surface of the rotating body 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is reduced. Even if it is smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 (the receiving portion 1236a) from being hard to see, and it is possible to entertain the game by the rotating body 1236 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized so that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e is provided on the rear side of the upper port 1238b. The game ball T that has flowed down through the upper port 1238b is reliably received by the receiving unit 1236a in a state where the receiving unit 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper port 1238b. Even if another game ball T abuts from above the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T abuts against another game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Can be prevented from falling off the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be reliably moved to the V prize opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. It can be sent.

  In addition, since the rear side of the upper port 1238b is provided with a loss hole 1230c communicating with the upper guiding portion 1238e and the second discharge path 1230e, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not aligned with the upper port 1238b. Even if the game ball T flows down from the prize winning port 1155 side and contacts the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 via the upper port 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. . On the other hand, with the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coinciding with the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T is already received by the receiving portion 1236a, and another gaming ball T flows down from the side of the prize winning port 1155. Even if the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a through the upper port 1238b is contacted from the upper side, another game ball T coming later is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the prize winning award 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V prize opening 1156 in a short time, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since one of the plurality of game balls T received at the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and received by the V winning opening 1156, a privilege is given to the rotating body 1236. Even if there is a game ball T that is not received by the receiving portion 1236a and is discharged from the lose hole 1230c, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Further, since the game ball T that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged from the lose hole 1230c to the rear side of the rotating body 1236, the game that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the left and right sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the V prize opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced. Accordingly, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, the rotating body 1236 can be disposed at an effective place in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game by the rotating body 1236 and suppress the player's interest from being lowered.

  Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed slightly behind the center of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game ball T of the receiving portion 1236a, and the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another game ball T coming later comes into contact with the slightly rearward position, the upper lip is opened through the upper guide portion 1238e in a state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When another game ball T from 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from above, another game ball T that has come in contact from above is guided to the rear having the loss hole 1230c. Thus, another game ball T coming later can be reliably discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

  Further, since another game ball T coming later comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game received by the receiving portion 1236a. A force that is pushed forward on the opposite side to the losing hole 1230c acts on the sphere T, and it is difficult for the sphere T to drop off to the losing hole 1230c side, and the state received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can be prevented from dropping and the player from being discouraged by having no opportunity to be received by the V prize opening 1156, and The game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a can be reliably received in the V prize opening 1156, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, the rotating body 1236 is provided with an inclined portion 1236b that is inclined obliquely on the front side (inside) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a so as to be inclined backward as it goes upward (away from the center of rotation). At the same time, by forming the center of the upper port 1238b slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a that receives the game ball T, the game ball T flowing down through the upper port 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Therefore, when the game ball T flows down from the upper port 1238b in a state where the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T contacts the inclined portion 1236, and the game ball T is inclined by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b and comes into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is reduced. Since the rotating body 1236 can be made difficult to break, and the circulation speed of the game ball T can be made to abut against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, the game can be played at the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made difficult to jump, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, the circulation speed of the game ball T guided by the upper guiding portion 1238e can be attenuated. Therefore, even if another game ball T that has circulated through the upper guiding portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the circulation speed can be reduced by circulating through the upper guiding portion 1238e. Is attenuated, the impact due to contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a jumps up from the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to make the game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a difficult to drop out of the receiving unit 1236a.

  Further, the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, and the circulation speed of the game ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e. The impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced even if the rotating portion 1236 is brought into contact (contact) with the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) through the upper portion 1238b through the portion 1238e. It can suppress that the rotary body 1236 becomes easy to be damaged by the impact by. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated and declining the interest in the game due to the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the rotating body 1236, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Can do.

  Also, in order for the game ball T to be received by the V prize opening 1156 via the rotator 1236, it is necessary to open the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 so that the prize winning opening 1155 can be received. Opportunities for accepting the ball T to the V prize opening 1156 (the accessory prize opening 1155) can be limited, and a premium feeling can be given to the V prize opening 1156 and the like. Accordingly, when the prize winning opening 1155 can be received in accordance with the gaming state, an opportunity to allow the V winning prize opening 1156 to accept the game ball T is obtained, so that the prize winning opening 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning prize opening 1156 are obtained. And the like, and the player can be expected to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156, and the player can throw the game ball T at the prize winning hole 1155. The operation can be actively performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

[Re-explanation of second start port 1153 and start port door member 1214]
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable start port unit 1210 extends left and right with the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 disposed on the right end side. The heights of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c that are possible are different, and the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 is positioned on the left side of the second start port 1153. The start port solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the opposite side of the second start port 1153 on the upper side and the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b. The game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the start port solenoid 1215. The forward / backward movement of the movable plunger 1215a is supported by the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth according to the changing gaming state (in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134). Since it is transmitted to the starting port door member 1214 and the starting port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the front and rear and vertical dimensions of the mechanism (variable starting port unit 1210) for sliding the starting port door member 1214 Can be made smaller than the conventional one. Therefore, since the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the gaming state can be reduced, the start port door that slides back and forth in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the member 1214 can be increased, and the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed by arranging the start door member 1214 in a place where the conventional pachinko machine could not be arranged. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player who wants to select it as a pachinko machine to play with a strong interest of the player can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 can be reduced. Even if the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, In addition, since the other members can be provided in the pachinko machine 1 without any problem, the decoration effect and the production effect by the other members can be sufficiently exhibited. It is possible to enhance the appeal of the player by improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the second start port 1153 is disposed on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion that extend to the left and right of the start port member 1214. Since the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by 1214c, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide of the start port member 1214 is provided. When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c and is received by the second start port 1153. As a result, the game ball T rolls toward the second start port 1153 on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. It can cause increased expectations for acceptance into the second start hole 1153 with respect to the technique's interest and to entertain the player can be suppressed. At this time, when the start door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c guide the game ball T to the second start port 1153. In addition, since the action of the start door member 1214 is opposite to that of a conventional pachinko machine variable receiving port (variable winning opening), it may have a strong impact on players who are used to the conventional pachinko machine. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  In addition, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the start door member 1214 are slid forward and protruded into the game area 1100 according to the game state. When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end side, so that it rolls on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c extending to the left and right. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth in accordance with the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a is moved left and right as the plunger 1215a moves back and forth. The main body 1216a revolves around the axis extending up and down around the main body 1216a so as to move, and the main body 1216a also extends up and down through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging portion 1216c and the main body 1216a. It will rotate around the axis. A connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending from the main body portion 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b is fitted and connected to a connecting pin 1214h protruding from the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, when the main body 1216a rotates, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves around the vertically extending axis, and the revolving of the connecting hole 1216e causes the connecting pin 1214h and the slider 1214g to pass through. Thus, the start port door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 which can transmit the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start opening solenoid 1215 and can reliably slide the start opening door member 1214 back and forth, and can achieve the above-described operation and effect, is realized. be able to.

  Further, the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length that extends to the slider portion 1214g below the start port solenoid 1215 in the start port door member 1214, and is shorter than the conventional one. The front and rear slide range of 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and rear dimensions can be made smaller than before. In addition, since the link member 1216 is rotated about the axis extending vertically, the vertical dimension is smaller than the conventional case where the link member 1216 is rotated about the axis extending horizontally. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable start port unit 1210) for sliding the start port door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized. it can.

  Further, since the game ball T received in the second start port 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower case 1211 through the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 Compared to the case where the rear case 1211 is guided and released, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 are provided with a passage member for receiving the game ball T received by the second start port 1153 on the rear side. There is no need, and it is possible to easily secure a space behind the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and an accessory on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the start port member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 is moved backward in the unacceptable position in the game area 1100, the second start port 1153 is placed in the game area 1100. Since the second starting port 1153 is not closed at all times, the player can be given an illusion that the game ball T can be received by the second starting port 1153, The person's interest can be strongly attracted to the second start port 1153. Therefore, since the second start port 1153 is always open, the player can be interested in the second start port 1153 regardless of the movement (sliding) of the start port door member 1214. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T into the second start opening 1153, and can be made tired of getting tired, and the second start opening 1153 for the player regardless of the position of the start opening door member 1214. It is possible to cause the player to perform a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, since the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the start port door member 1214 is positioned at any position of the acceptable position protruding forward and the unacceptable position retracted backward. Since it looks the same when viewed from the front, it is difficult for the player to determine the position of the start door member 1214. Accordingly, since the position of the start door member 1214 is difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that the start door member 1214 is a receivable position protruding forward, and the player aims at the start door member 1214. It is possible to entertain the game ball T by performing a driving operation.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the extra acceptance of the game balls T, the special lottery result in which the advantageous game state is generated by the extra game balls T received to the second start port 1153 is drawn in a lottery manner. It is possible to prevent the game from being played, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down above the second start port 1153, the second start port 1153 flows to the front surface. Since the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the path forming member 1161, the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is prevented from receiving the game ball T directly into the second starting port 1153. The second start port upper shelf portion 1161j is discharged downward from the left end portion. At this time, the start door member 1214 extending to the left and right according to the gaming state changed by the game ball T being driven into the game area 100 (according to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134) The game ball T released downward from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j in a state of sliding forward and protruding into the gaming area 1100 is a second starting port in a plan view of the starting port door member 1214. When it flows down to the left outer portion of the upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the start opening door member 1214 toward the second start opening 1153 and is received by the second start opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153, a privilege such as payout of the game ball T or a lottery of a special lottery result is given, so that the player can be entertained by the given privilege. At the same time, the operation of driving the game ball T toward the start port door member 1214 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153.

  The start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right is slid in the front-rear direction different from the receivable direction facing the left direction of the game ball T in the second start port 1153, so that the start port is located in the game area 1100. When the game ball T flows down on the start port door member 1214 when the door member 1214 is slid from the protruded state to the not protruded state (immersed state), the game ball T is flat on the start port door member 1214. Since it takes a certain amount of time from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j to the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. If the start opening door member 1214 is retracted and immersed during this time, the game ball T is not received by the second start opening 1153 and falls from the start opening door member 1214. That. More specifically, while the game ball T is rolling to the right toward the second start port 1153, the upper surface of the start port member 1214 on which the game ball T is placed by the retraction of the start port door member 1214 is It gradually becomes smaller, and before the game ball T reaches the second start port 1153, it will fall off from the start port member 1214. Therefore, since it can reduce that the game ball T is received by the 2nd start port 1153 extra, privilege (especially, especially by receiving the game ball T to the extra 2nd start port 1153 is received. It is possible to reduce giving a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  If the game ball T flows down on the start port door member 1214 while the start port member 1214 slides forward so as to protrude into the game area 1100, the start port door member 1214 causes the game ball T to be There is a possibility that the second start port 1153 is guided and accepted. However, since the start door member 1214 slides according to the gaming state, it is difficult to know the timing at which the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100. Since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start opening door member 1214 after confirming that the start opening is made, the start opening door member 1214 slides so as to protrude into the game area 1100. The possibility that the game ball T will flow down onto the start door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

  Further, since the start opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the start opening door member 1214, it acts on the start opening door member 1214 by the contact of the game balls T. A drive mechanism (starting-port solenoid 1215) that slides the starting-port door member 1214 only by the impact acting on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starting-port unit 1210 that supports the start-port door member 1214 in a slidable manner. And the link member 1216) are hardly affected, and the start port door member 1214 and the like (variable start port unit 1210) can be made difficult to be damaged.

  Furthermore, since the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) at which the start port door member 1214 is slid is shorter than when the start port door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Accordingly, the time from when the start port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 until the start port door member 1214 is retracted and immersed can be shortened, so that the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by the start port door member 1214. The start opening door member 1214 can be immersed before being played, and the second start opening 1153 can be made difficult to receive the game ball T. In addition, since the start port door member 214 is slid in the front-rear direction, a space for immersing the start port door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding are disposed on the rear side of the game area 1100. The inside of the game area 1100 is not compressed by a mechanism for sliding the start door member 1214 (the start opening solenoid 1215, the link member 1216, etc.), and the inside of the game area 1100 can be used as widely as possible. Can do.

  Further, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second start port 1153 in the start port member 1214 is formed flat without protrusions, the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. Even if the game ball T flows down on the starter door member 1214 when sliding back so as to be immersed from the state where it has been moved, the game ball T is attracted to the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the protrusion, and the starter door It is difficult for the game ball T to fall from the member 1214, and the game ball T does not jump up toward the second start port 1153 due to the protrusion, and the game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the start port door member 1214. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect.

  Further, the game ball T can be received from the left direction with respect to the second start port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right enters the second start port 1153 as it is. Therefore, when the game ball T is guided to the start opening door member 1214, the player can easily recognize that the second start opening 1153 is surely received. Accordingly, if the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, it can be assumed that the game ball T is allowed to flow into the second start port 1153 if the game ball T flows down to the start door member 1214. Thus, it is possible to actively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  In addition, the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth by projecting or immersing the start port door member 1214 into and out of the game area 1100 by the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1215a that is movable by energizing the start port solenoid 1215. As compared with the case where the motor is slid by a motor, the sliding speed of the start port door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration. Accordingly, since the start port door member 1214 can be quickly slid, the start port door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 before the game ball T on the start port door member 1214 is guided to the second start port 1153. It is possible to retreat from the inside, and it is possible to reliably reduce the amount of extra game balls T received into the second start port 1153, and to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery is made by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 110 by a player's operation. When the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the normal lottery result, the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 is When it flows down to the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j, it rolls to the left by the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and when discharged from the left end side, it flows downward by the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161m. The first start portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 located below the second start port area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j, Distributed in the U-turn shape by being guided to the right on the side opposite to the left along the member 1214, and thus acceptable to the second start hole 1153. When the game ball T is received at the second start opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a privilege and the lottery of the special lottery result is performed, so that the player can be entertained by the privilege and the game ball is played. In order for T to be received by the second starting port 1153, it is possible to enter the game ball T for the second starting port upper shelf 1161 j (right strike). At this time, the start opening door member 1214 is bent obliquely toward the left end side away from the second start opening 1153 below the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the second start opening region left standing wall 1161m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, the player sees that the game ball T is guided toward the second start port 1153 when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be recognized, and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second start port 1153 can be enhanced. In addition, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second start port 1153 in the start port door member 1214 and the second guide portion 1214b close to the second start port 1153 have different angles of inclination. Since the acceleration of the game ball T is fast at 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow at the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the part where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the rolling speed of the game ball T that has not changed on the start door member changes, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and to make the player less tired. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T varies between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the start port door member 1214, it rolls on the start port door member 1214. The player's interest can be attracted and attracted attention to the game ball T being played, and the start port member 1214 can be focused on the game ball T rolling on the start port member 1214. Thus, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 where the game ball T is guided.

  Further, the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 from above, it is illustrated. Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so that the game ball T can be circulated along the start door member 1214 extending to the left and right. The game ball T can be moved on the start door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 ° to 50 ° with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 from above. In the case of contact, the player can recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right where the second start port 1153 is located. Accordingly, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the game ball T can be received by the second start port 1153 when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. Can be made. Accordingly, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the player is actively engaged in driving the game ball T toward the first guide portion 1214a of the start port member 1214. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, since the left and right lengths in plan view of the first guide portion 1214a are formed within the range of 0.2 to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T is formed by the first guide portion 1214a. Can be surely guided to the second starting port 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided gaming ball T can be suppressed to be higher than necessary to make it easier to see the rolling gaming ball T. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game medium and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the left and right lengths in plan view of the starting port door member 1214 are formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 is formed. Thus, the game ball T rolling on the start port door member 1214 toward the second start port 1153 can be shown appropriately to the player without excess and deficiency, and the game ball T with impact can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movement of the game ball T and to reduce the interest of the player.

  When the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the game area 1100 when the start opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the start opening door Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second start port 1153, that is, the first guide portion 1214a side, the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214. Can flow down (abut). Accordingly, the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the start port door member 1214, and the movement of the game ball T by the start port door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a is given to the player. It can be surely shown, and it can suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged immediately above the start port door member 1214 so that the game ball T is distributed in a U-turn shape, the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j is disposed on the start port door member 1214. Compared with the case where the game ball T is distributed in a crank shape by being arranged at a position on the left outer side than the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the top of the first opening portion 1214a, The space in the left-right direction occupied by the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j and the like can be reduced. Accordingly, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the start door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the start door member 1214 and the like can be placed in the game area 1100 so that the player can easily see them. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be realized with certainty.

  Also, when the start door member 1214 is protruded into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second start opening area standing wall 1161m extends vertically on the left outside of the first guide part 1214a. By the time the game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j flows down onto the starting port door member 1214, it is brought into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m and left of the first guiding unit 1214a. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from flowing down to the outside, and to reliably flow the game ball T onto the starting port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and the second When the game ball T flowing down between the start port area left standing wall portion 1161m bounces against the start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), the game is played by the second start port region left standing wall portion 1161m. It is possible to reliably prevent T from flowing to the side opposite to the second starting port 1153 side, and the starting ball door member 1214 can reliably guide the game ball T to the second starting port 1153. .

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down to the upper side of the second start port 1153 that opens forward, The second starting port upper shelf 1161j is in contact with the second starting port upper shelf 1161j immediately above the starting port 1153, and rolls in a direction away from the position immediately above the second starting port 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface. It is discharged from the left end side away from the second starting port 1153 in the starting port upper shelf 1161j and comes into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m. At this time, the game ball T thrown into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, whereby the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. The game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and contacting the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m comes into contact with the starting port door member 1214 and is It is guided to the front side of the second start port 1153 and received by the second start port 1153. At this time, the second starting port region right standing wall 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second starting port 1153 on the same side as the side on which the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is high. Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second start port 1153 by the start port door member 1214 tries to pass through the front side of the second start port 1153, the game ball T passes through the second start port region right standing wall 1161k. The game ball T guided by the start opening door member 1214 is received by the second start opening 1153. When the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153, a bonus such as payout of the game ball T or a lottery result of the special lottery result is given, and the player can be entertained by the given bonus. Thus, the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the second start port 1153 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153. Then, before the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153, the game ball T comes into contact with the second start port upper shelf 1161j, the second start port region left standing wall 1161m, and the start port door member 1214. Therefore, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T in which the circulation direction changes rapidly, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Further, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, if the game ball T flows down onto the second starter upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T moves in a U-turn as described above. Therefore, when the distribution direction of the game ball T changes by 180 degrees, the distribution speed of the game ball T becomes relatively slow. Accordingly, since the movement of the game ball T distributed in a U-turn shape is easy to see, the movement of the game ball T can be easily enjoyed by the player, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T circulates in a U-turn shape, and when the start door member 1214 does not protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T Circulates in an inverted L-shape, so that the game ball T moves differently even if the game ball T flows down to the same second start port upper shelf 1161j according to the protrusion of the start port member 1214. be able to. Accordingly, since the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (according to the passage of the gate member 1134 by the game ball T), the game ball T with various movements is shown to the player. It can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest of the player from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the space | interval which can distribute | circulate only one game ball T between the 2nd starting port upper shelf part 1161j and the starting port door member 1214 arrange | positioned up and down is set as the 2nd starting port upper shelf part 1161j and the starting port. Since the vertical distance from the door member 1214 is reduced as much as possible, the game ball T that abuts against the second starting port left standing wall portion 1161m from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and circulates on the starting port door member 1214. The movement of the player can be made to make a sudden U-turn, so that the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T, which has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, since the start port member 1214 extends to the left and right longer than the second start port upper shelf 1161j, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second start port Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the start port door member 1214 is easily noticeable, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the projecting start port door member 1214. Therefore, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes, the player is made to pay attention to the starter door member 1214, whereby the second starter upper shelf 1161j near the starter door member 1214 and the second starter port area left standing wall 1161m. Therefore, the game balls T rolling on the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the start opening door member 1214 can be surely seen and moved in a U-turn shape. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball T, and to drive the game ball T toward the second start-port upper shelf 1161j so that the game ball T is distributed on the start-port door member 1214 to the player. It can be operated, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes, if the game ball T is circulated on the starter door member 1214 via the second starter upper shelf 1161j and the second starter region left standing wall 1161m, Since it is guided to the start port 1153 and is received by the second start port 1153, when the start port member 1214 protrudes according to the gaming state, the game ball T is moved to the start port member 1214 to the player. It is possible to positively perform the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, when the game ball T hitting the game area 1100 aiming at the second start port 1153 flows down onto the second start port upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T rolls leftward away from the second start port 1153. When the game ball T moves away from the second starting port 1153, the player can feel unhappy. When the game ball T is released from the second start port upper shelf 1161j, if the start port member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T separated from the second start port 1153 is moved by the start port door member 1214. Rolls in the right direction approaching the second start port 1153. In other words, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second start port 1153 side, the player can be pleased and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second start port 1153 is increased. It can suppress that interest falls.

  Further, since the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending up and down to the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is provided on the right outside of the second starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf extending left and right. Even if an attempt is made to accept the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of 1161j is raised to the second start port 1153 arranged below the second start port upper shelf 1161j, the right side of the second start port 1153 The second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received by the second starting port 1153. Accordingly, in order for the second start port 1153 to accept the game ball T, the second start port 1153 needs to flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second start port upper shelf 1161j is lowered. It is possible to prompt the player to drive the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf 1161j on the second start port so that the game ball T flows down to the side. When the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the game ball T is formed by the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, the second start opening area left standing wall 1161m, and the start opening door member 1214. Since the U-turn is guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153, the game ball T flowing around can be enjoyed and the expectation for the reception of the game ball T into the second starting port 1153 can be enjoyed. It is possible to increase the game performance, and to delight the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation, the game state is changed by the game ball T that is driven, and the game state is changed. Accordingly, the start port member 1214 that extends in the left-right direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 slides forward and protrudes into the game area 1100. In this game area 1100, a second start port right standing wall 1161k protruding forward on the right side of the second start port 1153 is disposed, and the second start port 1153 is located above the second start port 1153. A second start port upper shelf portion 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the start port door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side is lowered from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k, and the start port door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When projecting inward, the left end of the start port door member 1214 extends outward from the left end of the second start port upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T flows down onto the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, it rolls on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j toward the left end, and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T is received on the start door member 1214 with a very high probability. Accordingly, when the start port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the start port door member 1214 are located above the second start port upper shelf 1161j and outside the left end. When the game ball T is caused to flow down, the game ball T is received on the start port door member 1214. Then, the game ball T received on the start port member 1214 is guided to the second start port 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. When the game is accepted into the start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a privilege, a lottery of a special lottery result, and the like, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, the start port door member 1214 extends in the left-right direction so as to be able to receive a plurality of game balls T in the left-right direction (about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T). It is possible to cause the player to have an illusion that many game balls T are accepted by the second start port 1153. In detail, when a player gets used to the game in a conventional pachinko machine equipped with an opening / closing member extending to the left and right, interest in the size of the opening / closing member extending to the left and right becomes stronger. The interest is relatively weak with respect to the size of the entrance (for example, the big prize opening). That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening / closing member is, the more game balls T can be received. Therefore, the start door member 1214 that protrudes into the game area 1100 and extends to the left and right according to the gaming state is recognized as an opening / closing member in a conventional pachinko machine, and the start door member 1214 extends to the left and right. Therefore, it is illusion that many game balls T can be accepted. Then, when the player has an illusion, it is possible to positively perform a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. it can. On the other hand, the second start port 1153 through which the game ball T is guided by the start port member 1214 is formed in a size that can accept only one game ball T in reality. Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they are not accepted at a time, but only one at a time. Therefore, the number of game balls T received per hour can be reduced as compared to the conventional technology, and the privilege to be granted is By relatively decreasing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received by the second start port 1153 even if the second start port upper shelf 1161j is aimed in addition to the start port door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged above the starting port door member 1214 (second starting port 1153), the left and right lengths of the starting port door member 1214 are substantially the entire length. It can be the same as receiving the game ball T over the whole, and the player can be entertained by placing a lot of game balls T. At this time, since a lower end on the left side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is received on the starting port door member 1214, a plurality of game balls T exist simultaneously on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j. Even then, it will be delivered one by one onto the start opening door member 1214 and guided to the second start opening 1153, so that a large number of game balls T can be prevented from being received by the second start opening 1153 at a time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since a second start port upper shelf 1161j and a second start port right standing wall 1161k projecting into the game area 1100 are provided on the upper and right sides of the second start port 1153, the game is started by the start port door member 1214. If the ball T is not guided to the second start port 1153, it is difficult for the second start port 1153 to accept the game ball T. Therefore, if the start opening door member 1214 does not protrude, the second start opening 1153 cannot accept the game ball T. Therefore, the protrusion of the start opening door member 1214 can give the player a premium feeling. The protrusion of the start door member 1214 can cause the player to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game is raised to suppress the interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Further, since the upright wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the start port door member 1214 is provided, the first guide portion inclined so that the right side of the start port door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided toward the front side of the second start port 1153 by the 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b abuts on the standing wall portion 1214e, so that it passes the front side of the second start port 1153 and further to the right. Can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes into the game area 1100 on the right side of the second starting port 1153. The right standing wall 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Accordingly, the game ball T received by the start port door member 1214 can be reliably guided to the second start port 1153 and received.

  In addition, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward and protrudes into the game area 1100, more games than the case where the start door member 1214 is rotated and protruded. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the start door member 1214 is easily damaged by an impact caused by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the start port door member is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right, and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the start port door member is projected. It is difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation from the length from the lower side to the upper side of the start door member, so that it can sufficiently resist the impact caused by receiving many game balls T. There is a possibility of not being able to. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start port door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side can be made longer than the portion of the start port door member 1214 protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T.

  Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward and protrudes into the game area 1100, the start door member 1214 slides backward when the game ball T exists on the start door member 1214. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the start port member 1214, the game ball T falls off from the start port member 1214 before being guided to the second start port 1153, and the second start port 1153. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being received excessively, and to reduce an increase in the load on the game hall side.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation is a plurality of obstacle nails G, windmills, and center objects arranged in the game area 1100. By abutting 1130, the winning prize opening unit 1150, etc., it will circulate while moving in various directions, and the player can entertain the game ball T by making various movements. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to circulate directly below the obstacle nail G etc. on which the game ball T abuts, so that the game ball T is easy to circulate in the game area 1100. A (first area) and an area that is difficult to circulate are formed. Accordingly, the game ball T is not received by the second start port 1153 arranged below the second start port upper shelf 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second start-port upper shelf portion 1161j disposed on the downstream side in response to the detection of the game ball T that has passed therethrough The start opening door member 1214 appears to advance in the area (first area) where the game balls T in the game area 1100 are easy to flow, and is outside the area where the game balls T are easy to flow. An area (second area) where the game ball T is easy to circulate is formed in the area where the game ball T below the part 1161j is difficult to circulate. Accordingly, the distribution path of the game ball T is changed by the appearance of the start door member 1214, and the game ball T can be distributed to an area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute in a normal state. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T that circulates in the region that cannot be seen (second region), and to prevent the player from becoming bored and to reduce the interest of the player.

  Also, when the starter door member 1214 appears to move forward and the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 is guided by the starter door member 1214, it is received by the second starter 1153 with a very high probability. When the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a bonus, or a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated. Therefore, when the start port member 1214 appears, It is possible to make the player actively perform the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and to make the player entertain the operation of the game ball T and suppress the interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, the second start port 1153 where the game ball T is paid out, the lottery of the special lottery result, and the like is performed is arranged in a region (second region) where the game ball T is difficult to circulate when the start port door member 1214 is in a normal state. Therefore, even if the game ball T is hit with the second start port 1153, the game ball T is not accepted. When the starter door member 1214 advances in accordance with the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 and the game ball T can be distributed to the region where the game ball T is difficult to distribute (second region), the second start port The game ball T can be received in 1153. Therefore, even if the second start port 1153 is open in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be received in a normal state, and it must be received unless the start port member 1214 appears (advances). Therefore, the advancement of the start door member 1214 can give the player a premium feeling, and the advancement of the start door member 1214 may have something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, in order to advance (appear) the start door member 1214 to form an area (second area) where the game ball T is easy to flow, it is necessary to pass the game ball T through the gate member 1134. The player can perform a game ball T driving operation (right-handed) aiming at the gate member 1134, and the player can enjoy the game ball T driving operation to reduce interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the start door member 1214 moves in the front-rear direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, it is not necessary to secure a space for the start opening door member 1214 to be immersed in the game area 1100. The area in which the game ball T circulates in the game area 1100 can be made as wide as possible, and the game sphere T circulates over a wide range, so that the movement of the game sphere T increases and the game sphere T is given to the player. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by delighting the movement of

  Further, since the flat start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, It can be difficult to determine whether the start port member 1214 is appearing forward or retreating. Accordingly, whether or not the starter door member 1214 has appeared can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 flows through the position of the starter door member 1214 and comes into contact with the starter door member 1214. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the movement of the game ball T that is thrown into the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance state, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T flows down outside the left end of the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j in a state where the start port door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide portion 1214a of the flat start port door member 1214 is formed. The second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j is guided to the lower side of the upper start opening portion 1161j so that the game ball T is difficult to circulate in a normal state where the start opening door member 1214 is immersed. The game ball T can be reliably distributed below 1161j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the start door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction so as to appear in and out of the game area 1100, and the start door member is in circulation (rolling) on the upper surface of the start door member 1214. When the 1214 moves backward, or while the starting port door member 1214 is moving backward, the second starting port is changed while the direction in which it flows from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j to the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m is changed. When the game ball T flows down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the start port member 1214 extends to the left and right. Since the start opening door member 1214 is retracted in a very short time by driving the start opening solenoid 1215, the game ball T reaches the right end (third guide portion 1214c) of the start opening door member 1214. To, game ball T is that would fall from the upper starting opening the door member 1214. Accordingly, when the start opening door member 1214 starts to be retracted, the game ball T can be prevented from being sufficiently guided, so that the game ball T can be received by the second start opening 1153. It can suppress, and it can suppress that the burden of the game hall which has installed the pachinko machine 1 increases. Also, the game ball T falling from the middle of the start door member 1214 can make the player feel disappointing and can increase the expectation for the next opportunity, thereby suppressing the interest of the player from decreasing. can do.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 1100 Game area 1112 Game panel 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Prize opening unit 1151 General winning opening 1152 First starting opening 1153 Second starting opening 1154 Large winning opening 1155 A prize winning opening (variable entrance)
1156 V prize opening (special entrance)
1220 Bonus unit 1220A Bonus port unit 1220B V Award port unit 1221 Bonus port opening / closing member 1230 Unit base 1230c Loss hole (discharge port)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a Plunger 1233 Drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a Shaft part 1233b Extension piece 1233c Drive gear 1233d Engagement part 1234 Driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a Follower gear 1236 Rotating body 1236a Receiving portion 1238 Ball guiding member 1238a Peripheral wall portion 1238b Upper port (accommodating port)
1238c Right mouth (discharge port)
1238d Ball entrance 1238e Upper guidance part 1238f Right guidance part T Game ball

Claims (1)

Launching means in which game media are sequentially fired to the game area;
An open / close member operable between a closed state and an open state, and when the open / close member is in the open state, a game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area enters the internal area. Winning prize means,
Advantageous game control means capable of executing game control advantageous to the player when the game medium that has entered the internal area of the prize opening means is received in the specific area;
An opening / closing control means for controlling the operation of the opening / closing member,
The winning prize means is:
When the launch of the game medium by the launching means is continued when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game medium placed in a waiting state for entering the internal area of the prize opening means within the specific rolling area When there is a medium maintaining means that can maintain the number at one or more, and a game medium that is waiting for entry by the medium maintaining means, the opening and closing member is placed in the entry waiting state. Maintenance medium entry permitting means for allowing the game medium to enter the inner area of the prize opening means,
The opening / closing control means includes
While the number of game media in the waiting state for entering the internal area of the prize opening means can be maintained at one or more by the medium maintenance means, it is shorter than the game medium firing interval by the launching means. An opening efficiency improvement control means capable of performing a short opening operation allowing the entry of the game medium in the waiting state for entry into the internal area of the winning-ahead means even though it is an opening time, a plurality of times;
When there is a game medium that enters the internal area of the winning opening means when the short opening operation is executed a plurality of times by the opening efficiency improvement control means, regardless of the number of the game media, A gaming machine characterized in that only one gaming medium can be guided.